RAM 1500
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
21_DT_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 RAM 1500
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................................... 104
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 140
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................236
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................310
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 373
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 395
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................467
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................479
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................483
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................11
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................11
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..........................11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11
Symbol Glossary...................................................12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................17
Key Fob.........................................................17
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................20
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................21
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................21
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...22
How To Use Remote Start ...........................22
To Exit Remote Start Mode .........................23
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If
Equipped ......................................................24
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 24
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 25
Remote Start Abort Message......................25
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........25
How To Use Remote Start ...........................25
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .. 26
To Arm The System...................................... 26
To Disarm The System ................................ 26
Rearming Of The System............................. 27
Security System Manual Override .............. 27
DOORS .................................................................. 27
Manual Door Locks...................................... 27
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 28
Power Side Steps — If Equipped................. 28
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 28
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped................................................... 30
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 30
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ................................................... 31
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 31
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 31
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 32
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 32
Programming The Memory Feature............ 33
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory ........................................................ 33
Memory Position Recall............................... 34
SEATS ................................................................... 34
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 34
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 36
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 36
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...................... 38
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 39
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ................... 39
Head Restraints........................................... 40
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................41
Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 41
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 42
Get Started................................................... 43
Additional Information................................. 43
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED..........................................................43
MIRRORS ..............................................................44
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 46
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped ...................................................... 47
Power Mirrors............................................... 47
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped .... 47
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 48
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 48
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................... 48
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................49
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 49
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels........ 49
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ..............49
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener.................................................50
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device..................................51
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button...........................................................51
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 51
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................52
Headlight Switch..........................................52
Multifunction Lever .....................................53
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) .................53
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 53
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped .................................53
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................54
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........54
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 54
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 54
Headlight Delay............................................55
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 55
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................55
Turn Signals ................................................55
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 55
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights With
Bed Lights — If Equipped............................. 56
Battery Saver ............................................... 57
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 57
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 57
Illuminated Entry ......................................... 58
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 58
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 58
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped............ 59
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 60
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 60
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions...................................................... 63
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped................................................... 65
Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 66
Operating Tips ............................................. 66
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 68
Storage ......................................................... 68
USB/AUX Control ......................................... 72
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 74
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 75
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ........ 77
WINDOWS ............................................................ 77
Power Windows............................................ 77
Automatic Window Features....................... 78
Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 78
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 79
Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped .................................................. 79
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped................................................... 79
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 80
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....................80
Single Pane Power Sunroof —
If Equipped................................................... 80
Dual Pane Power Sunroof —
If Equipped................................................... 82
HOOD .....................................................................84
To Open The Hood....................................... 84
To Close The Hood....................................... 85
TAILGATE ...............................................................85
Opening ........................................................ 85
Closing.......................................................... 85
Locking Tailgate........................................... 85
Multifunction Tailgate — If Equipped.......... 85
Tailgate Removal ........................................ 86
Bed Step — If Equipped............................... 89
PICKUP BOX .........................................................90
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .................................................. 91
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED ....................................92
Locking And Unlocking RamBox................. 93
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................... 93
RamBox Safety Warning ............................. 94
Bed Divider — If Equipped........................... 95
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................97
Camper Applications ................................... 97
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED .....97
Tonneau Cover Components.......................97
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Folding For
Driving Or Removal...................................... 98
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation..........101
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ..............103
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE ........................................................... 104
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gasoline............................105
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE ........................................................... 107
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gasoline............................108
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL................................................................. 109
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel ................................110
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL................................................................. 112
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel ...............................113
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.....................114
Instrument Cluster Display Controls.........114
Oil Life Reset..............................................115
Display Menu Items...................................116
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Messages ..................................................121
Displays ......................................................123
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages ...................................................123
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault
Warning Messages ....................................124
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................125
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................126
Red Warning Lights ...................................126
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................129
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................133
Green Indicator Lights...............................135
White Indicator Lights ...............................136
Blue Indicator Lights..................................137
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.....137
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .............................................138
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............................138
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 140
Automatic Transmission............................141
AutoPark.....................................................141
Tip Start Feature .......................................143
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................143
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button — Gasoline Engine ..............143
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button — Diesel Engine ..................144
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) .................................................146
After Starting..............................................146
Starting Fluids — Diesel Engine Only........146
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ....... 146
Cold Weather Precautions ........................146
Engine Idling ..............................................148
Stopping The Engine .................................148
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 150
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ........................................... 150
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE.................................................. 151
PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 151
Electric Park Brake (EPB)..........................151
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .......................... 154
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................155
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................155
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......156
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 161
Four-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case — If Equipped ....................161
Five-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case — If Equipped ....................163
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 165
Description .................................................165
Air Suspension Modes...............................167
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......168
Operation....................................................168
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED....................................... 169
Description .................................................169
Air Suspension Modes...............................171
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......171
Operation....................................................172
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............. 173
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 174
POWER STEERING............................................. 174
Electric Power Steering ............................174
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.........................................175
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............175
Autostop Mode...........................................175
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................175
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................176
To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start
System........................................................176
To Manually Turn On The Stop Start
System........................................................177
System Malfunction...................................177
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................177
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................177
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped.................................................179
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....................................189
ParkSense Sensors ...................................190
ParkSense Warning Display......................190
ParkSense Display.....................................190
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
Rear ParkSense.........................................193
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................193
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............194
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....194
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 195
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................196
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ................................197
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 199
LaneSense Operation................................199
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................200
LaneSense Warning Message.................. 200
Changing LaneSense Status.....................202
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 202
AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................204
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED........................................................... 204
AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................208
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE................................................................ 208
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
ENGINE ............................................................... 210
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ...............210
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel...............210
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..................................211
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage....................211
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid .....................211
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 213
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......213
Payload.......................................................213
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............213
Tire Size......................................................213
Rim Size......................................................214
Inflation Pressure ......................................214
Curb Weight................................................214
Loading.......................................................214
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 214
Common Towing Definitions .....................214
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight.........................................................218
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)..........................................218
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................219
Trailer Reverse Steering Control...............219
Towing Requirements ...............................221
Towing Tips ................................................227
SNOWPLOW ...................................................... 227
Before Plowing ...........................................228
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability ..................................................228
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached .....................................................229
Operating Tips............................................229
General Maintenance................................229
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ...................................................230
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................230
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................230
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................231
DRIVING TIPS......................................................234
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................234
Driving Through Water ..............................234
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................235
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................236
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................236
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................237
Customer Programmable Features ..........237
HEAD-UP DISPLAY (HUD) ..................................254
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................256
System Overview .......................................256
Safety And General Information ...............258
UCONNECT MODES............................................259
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................259
Radio Mode ...............................................259
Media Mode ..............................................268
Phone Mode ..............................................271
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 282
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................282
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................282
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................284
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................286
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account ......................................................301
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 301
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................301
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs ..............................................302
Connected Services Roadside
Assistance FAQs .......................................302
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....302
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ..........................................................303
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs .......................................303
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs .................................................303
Connected Services Remote Horn &
Lights FAQs ................................................304
Connected Services Account FAQs...........304
Data Collection & Privacy..........................306
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 307
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................307
Vehicle Dynamics.......................................308
Accessory Gauge........................................308
Pitch & Roll.................................................308
Suspension ................................................309
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 309
Regulatory And Safety Information...........309
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 310
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................310
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...311
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 318
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................318
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................324
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................................327
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 334
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....334
Important Safety Precautions ...................334
Seat Belt Systems .....................................335
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...342
Child Restraints..........................................355
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................369
Transporting Passengers ..........................369
Transporting Pets ......................................369
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................369
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................371
Exhaust Gas ..............................................371
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................372
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................373
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....373
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......................377
Preparations For Jacking...........................377
Jack Location .............................................378
Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................378
Removing The Spare Tire..........................380
Jacking Instructions...................................381
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................384
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............385
JUMP STARTING ................................................386
Preparations For Jump Start.....................386
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................387
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................389
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................389
MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................390
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................391
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 392
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................393
Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................393
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......394
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 394
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE ............................................................... 395
Maintenance Plan .....................................395
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 399
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To
B5 Biodiesel ..............................................400
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20
Biodiesel.....................................................403
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 404
3.6L Engine With Stop/Start ....................404
5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start ...............405
5.7L Engine With Stop/Start.....................406
3.0L Diesel Engine ....................................407
Checking Oil Level .....................................408
Adding Washer Fluid .................................408
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................409
Pressure Washing......................................409
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 409
Engine Oil — Gas Engine ...........................410
Engine Oil Filter..........................................410
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................411
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ............................................412
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine ..................413
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel — Diesel Engine .................................414
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow (Diesel Engine)....414
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................415
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................415
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................417
Body Lubrication........................................418
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................418
Exhaust System ........................................420
Cooling System .........................................421
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler (Diesel
Engine)........................................................424
Brake System ............................................425
Automatic Transmission ...........................426
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level .................................................426
Transfer Case ............................................427
FUSES .........................................................427
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................437
TIRES....................................................................443
Tire Safety Information..............................443
Tires — General Information .....................449
Tire Types ...................................................454
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................455
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................456
Snow Traction Devices ..............................458
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............460
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................460
Treadwear ..................................................460
Traction Grades .........................................461
Temperature Grades .................................461
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................461
BODYWORK ........................................................461
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......461
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........462
Preserving The Bodywork..........................462
INTERIORS .........................................................464
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................464
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................465
Leather Surfaces .......................................465
Glass Surfaces ..........................................466
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ................ 467
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 467
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 467
Torque Specifications ...............................467
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
ENGINE ............................................................... 468
3.6L Engine ...............................................468
5.7L Engine................................................469
Reformulated Gasoline .............................469
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................469
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................469
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles......................................................470
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..470
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline..................470
Fuel System Cautions................................470
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE....... 471
Diesel Fuel Specifications.........................471
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................472
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 474
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 475
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 478
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 479
Prepare For The Appointment...................479
Prepare A List.............................................479
Be Reasonable With Requests .................479
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 479
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................479
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........480
Mexico ........................................................480
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............480
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................480
Service Contract ........................................480
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................481
MOPAR® PARTS................................................481
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................481
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................481
In Canada...................................................481
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .........................482
General Information ..........................................482
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 234.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/
body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/
camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer
to the Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION!
An unsafe practice which may result in personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 104.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 126
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 126
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 126
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 127
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 128
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 128
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 128
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 128
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 128
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 129
Tailgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 129
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 129
Red Warning Lights
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 129
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 129
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 129
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 130
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 130
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 131
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 131
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 132
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 132
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 132
Yellow Warning Lights
1
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 133
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 133
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 133
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 133
Yellow Warning Lights
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 134
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
Yellow Indicator Lights
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 134
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 134
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 134
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Yellow Indicator Lights
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 135
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 137
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 136
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 136
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 136
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 136
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 136
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 136
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Ú page 136
Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With Base/Midline Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 136
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 137
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 137
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 137
White Indicator Lights
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the
RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The
key fob also contains an emergency key, which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be found if
it is placed within 15 cm (150 mm) of the pad
Ú page 77.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
1 — Unlock
2 — LED Light
3 — Lock
4 — Tailgate Lowering
5 — Remote Start
6 — PANIC
7 — Emergency Key
8 — Air Suspension
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all
the doors and the tailgate, push the lock button
once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. The horn chirp
when the lock button is pushed can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 237.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your
vehicle can be lowered by pushing the
key fob air suspension lowering button
two times. When air suspension
lowering is requested using the key fob, the
vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes to
alert the customer that the operation has begun
and will continue these alerts until it successfully
lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the
vehicle to lower remotely:
The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit
(Park) ride height.
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
All doors must be closed.
The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets,
and people prior to remote lowering.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime.
When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle
will raise up to the next defined level and lock
out the remote lowering feature until the
ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
suspension lowering button one time during the
lowering process. When vehicle lowering is
cancelled, the horn will chirp two times and the
turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one
time.
NOTE:
More information on air suspension is provided
later in this manual Ú page 165.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on
the key fob above the top row buttons blinks
when a button is pressed. The coin battery
should last a minimum of three years with
normal vehicle usage.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing
the emergency key release button (2) on
the side of the key fob, and pulling the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap
on the left side between the housing and
the back cover of the key fob. Use a small
screw driver (or similar tool) to pry open the
left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the
key fob, which is positioned further to the
edge than the left side gap. Pry open the
right side, and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back
toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign
on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
top edge of the back cover with the top of
the fob, and press the edges into the
interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer Ú page 482.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 482.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power sunroof, power windows etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a
low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Back Up Starting Method
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
Engine starting procedure Ú page 140.
When opening the driver's door and the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition or
Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the customer
enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, press the brake pedal and
push and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 237. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 60.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
includes turning the climate controls off using
the OFF button.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting remote start will its resume
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position Ú page 482.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the
key fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the
Wait To Start indicator light Ú page 135 to
extinguish before cranking the engine. This
allows time for the engine pre-heat cycle to
pre-heat the cylinder air, and is normal in
cold weather. For further information on the
Wait To Start indicator light and the pre-heat
cycle see .
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated
Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior
switches for door locks and tailgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 28.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 28.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
the door key cylinder when the system is
armed will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power tailgate (if equipped) is
opened using the tailgate button on the key
fob.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the tailgate, the Vehicle Security
system is disarmed and the rest of the
vehicle doors will remain locked unless
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even
if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for
easier entry and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power
Side Steps will deploy when any of the doors are
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
through the touchscreen. When configured for
“Store” mode, the steps will not deploy unless
the setting is selected manually through the
“Controls” menu within the touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or
if the retract setting is selected within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 237, the steps will retract.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
You can select between “Unlock Driver Door
1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
within the Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are five situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in
pre-arm or armed status and the tailgate
transitions from opened to closed.
When the tailgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The LED light on the key fob will not blink
if the key fob battery is low or fully
depleted, but a low key fob battery condi-
tion will still support the Passive Entry
system functionality. When the key fob
battery is low, the instrument cluster will
display a message indicating that the key
fob battery is low Ú page 17
Ú page 482.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 237.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a
door is engaged, that door can only be opened
by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the
control upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
Side mirrors
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
The driver memory settings switch is located on
the driver door, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seat back is in the upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. If equipped, the back of
the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat
Center Portion Folded Forward
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
while actuating the handle. The seatback
may swing forward and hit you causing
injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the front of the
rear outboard seat cushions. To adjust the seat
back, lift upward on the handle, and slide the
seat bottom forward. The lower portion of the
seat back will tilt rearward. When you reach the
desired position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations
NOTE:
This feature is not available if vehicle is
equipped with rear bench seat.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and passenger seats. The power
seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the driver and passenger seat cushions.
There are two power seat switches that are
used to control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
(Continued)
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends
on where you have the driver’s seat positioned
when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver’s seat will move
about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the
driver’s seat position is greater than or equal
to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When you remove the key fob from the igni-
tion, the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop
if the driver’s seat position is between
0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 32.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system Ú page 237.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, MED,
LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights
in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans
operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
If equipped, the two outboard rear seats will
have ventilated seats. The rear ventilated seat
control switches are located on the rear of the
center console.
There are two ventilated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The fans operate at three
speeds: HI, MED, and LO. Push the ventilated
seat buttons to toggle through the speeds, or to
turn the feature off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINERS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are attached to the underside of
the rear seat cushion. To access these hooks,
lift the rear seat cushion upward.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, the center head restraint is not adjustable
or removable.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but can be folded down for
improved rearward visibility. Push the button on
the outboard side of the head restraint to
release. To return the head restraint to its
upright position, push up on the head restraint
until it locks back into place.
Release Button
The center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If any of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
For child restraint tethering Ú page 334.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc
Ú page 482.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to
allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. This
feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the headlight switch.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition
placed in the OFF position.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the
vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Cruise
Control system or Adaptive Cruise Control
system is on. The following messages will
appear in the instrument cluster display if the
pedals are attempted to be adjusted when
the system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse”.
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary
to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 32, you can use your key fob
or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to
pre-programmed positions.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
road behind while driving.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, push the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
forward.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control
to access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Pan (if equipped)
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, pull the on/off control back
toward the steering wheel to return the mirror to
the regular Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during night time driving in low light applica-
tions.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 237.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the
passenger’s outside mirror, will automatically
dim for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically
adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory
Settings feature Ú page 32.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded
rearward and unfolded into the normal driving
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the normal driving
position. If the mirror does not fold
automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at
the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple attempts). This resets them to
their normal driving position.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS — IF
E
QUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering
an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the
main mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 60.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with Driver
Memory Settings, this feature will be linked to
the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 50. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 50, and
follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the Home-
Link button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 482.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Push Cargo Light Switch
5 — Push Fog Light Switch
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position,
or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on
the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation.
Once the turn signal is no longer active, the
DRL lamp will illuminate.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 237.
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific
light and automatically switch from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto Dim High Beams” within your
Uconnect Settings Ú page 237, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the high beam lever
6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position. The
system will return to the default setting upon
placing the ignition in the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
Wiper system Ú page 59, and it is activated,
the headlights will automatically turn on after
the wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 237.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the
driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the fog light button on
the headlight switch.
Fog Light Button
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
button is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will
illuminate depending on the direction in which
the vehicle is turning. This will provide
increased visibility while turning, depending on
the angle of the steering wheel.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS WITH BED LIGHTS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, and trailer spotter
lights are turned on by pushing the cargo light
button located on the lower half of the headlight
switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
Cargo Lights
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the
bed light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display when these lights are
on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn
the lights off.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will
turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a
key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the
button on the headlight switch, the trailer
spotter lights will remain illuminated when the
vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE. The trailer spotter lights will turn off
when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
NOTE:
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and
will turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or REVERSE. The bed lights are not
affected by gear selection.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and
mirror spotter lights will not work while the
vehicle is in motion. In every other state, the
cargo and mirror spotter lights will turn off when
the vehicle is in motion, but the bed light will
remain on. In all states, including California and
Mississippi, if a bed camera is deactivated, the
bed lights will turn back on.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any
door is left open or the dimmer control is
rotated all the way up to the dome light on
position, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle
is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a
door is open and the interior lights are on, and
the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
console is pressed, the interior lights will turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be
operated individually as reading lights by
pushing the corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
available for your vehicle.
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
Push round puck lens on/off (if equipped
with Dual Pane Sunroof)
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure
they have been turned off before exiting the
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn
off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent
to the headlight switch located on the left side
of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome ON Button
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior and ambient light levels when the
headlights are on.
NOTE:
The dimming of the touchscreen is program-
mable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if
equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome ON
button on the overhead console is pushed. The
overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off
after 10 minutes to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
console is pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
will also be turned off by pushing the Dome
Defeat button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction
lever, inward and hold. Washer fluid will be
sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to
three cycles after the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several
seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will
turn on and cycle approximately three times
after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push
the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward briefly and release.
The wipers will cycle one time and automatically
shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 418.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay detent position four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Positions one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can
be used if the driver desires more sensitivity.
Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmis-
sion is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen or
on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Auto-
matic Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic Tem-
perature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 65.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display
will only appear if the system is equipped
with an automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on
vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
pushing the Mode button on the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate (if equipped)
to turn the Climate Control on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window cleaning operation.
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The blower
speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 461.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode)position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
position and turn on
(A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor
Mode) position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
(Mix Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim
panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button (If
Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
on the armrest could be seriously injured
during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only
use the center seating position when the
armrest is fully upright.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be
thrown about endangering occupants of
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed
a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage
area contains a USB power outlet that can be
used to power small electrical devices.
Center Storage Compartment
Upper Storage USB Outlet
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower
handle to open the lower storage bin. The lower
bin contains a power inverter. There is also a
“fill line” located along the rear inside wall of the
lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may
interfere with cupholder placement if equipped
with a premium center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with
two front storage bins located in front of the
center storage compartment. These storage
bins may be equipped with tandem doors. Push
the front bin to access the cupholders, or push
the rear bin to access the coin holder/small
storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access
the front lower storage bin, or forward to access
the rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, storage can be found by folding down the
center seat back. A console storage area and
cupholders are available.
Front Bench Seat Storage
With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
Below Seat Bottom Storage
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped
The center portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat
will fold forward for rear seat cupholders and a
storage compartment. Lift up on the console
latch to access the storage compartment.
Rear Console Latch Location
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on
the handle of the latch and open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for
securing cargo. These hooks should be used to
secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks
NOTE:
The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lbs
(113 kg).
Storage Under Rear Seat — If Equipped
To access the storage under the rear seats,
unlatch the lock mechanism in the center of the
seat base by rotating it to either side, and fold
the front of the seat base forward.
Folding Down Front Of Seat Base
Flip the inside of the base upward into the
upright position, locking into place, creating and
extended storage area.
Fully Extended Storage Area
NOTE:
The rear seats do not need to be folded up to
access this feature.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also
an AUX port located in the middle of the USB
Ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
1 — Lock Mechanism
2 — Front Of Seat Base
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
Rear USB Ports
The third and fourth USB ports are located
behind the center console, above the power
inverter. One of these USBs ports are charge
only.
Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With
12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are
listed below when a non-phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a
USB port located on the top tray of the vehicles
center console.
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two
Standard USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port
may be located to the left of the center stack,
just below the climate controls.
1 — USB Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port #2
1 — Rear Media USB Ports
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging.
You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,
Android Auto™, Pandora®, and others while
charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
for use with the standard “cigarette lighter”
style plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt
(2.5 Amp) USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap
attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol, battery
symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
can provide power at all times.
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the
tray on top of the center stack. This power outlet
only works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160
Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded,
the fuse protecting the system will need to
be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to
unplug any equipment as to not drain the
battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected
to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may
be located inside the center console towards
the right hand side. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery
Fed Position
2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition
Fed Position
3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB
(Charge Only)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
the center console. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet the inverter
should reset.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, there may
be a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter
located to the right of the center stack, just
below the climate controls. This inverter can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
400 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Center Stack Power Inverter
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE:
The Center Stack Power Inverter is only avail-
able on vehicles equipped with a front bench
seat.
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
E
QUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the
center console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile
phone. Qi is a standard that allows wireless
charging of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate
can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place, and an LED indicator
light.
NOTE:
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power win-
dow switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console. Push the
switch rearward to open the glass. Pull the
switch forward to close the glass.
Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window
helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the
window.
Manual Rear Window Lock
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 237.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DUAL PANE POWER SUNROOF — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic
stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
stop position and a full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed positions:
half open and full open positions. When
operating the sunshade from the closed
position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be
actuated again to continue on to full open
position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at
half open position will first automatically close
the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and
release it within one-half second, the sunshade
will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the switch
again from the half open position and the
sunshade will open to the full open position and
stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
close automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunshade in a partially
open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward,
the sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch again and the sunshade will
open to the full open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed
position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade was not already open, it will
automatically open prior to the roof opening to
the vent position.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 237.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever Location
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and push the safety latch lever
to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Safety Latch Location
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
TAILGATE
OPENING
The tailgate may be opened by pushing the
tailgate release pad located on the tailgate
door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate
to the open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and
release the Tailgate Release button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The tailgate door
will unlatch, and slowly lower into the open
position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to
release the tailgate. An indicator light may also
signal when the tailgate is open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be
stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 97
may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are securely latched.
LOCKING TAILGATE
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob
lock button.
MULTIFUNCTION TAILGATE — IF
E
QUIPPED
The 60/40 multifunction tailgate has two swing
doors to allow for closer access to the pickup
box with the doors open.
Opening
The tailgate must be latched closed to open the
swing doors. Push the paddle down, then pull
the release handle beneath the tailgate
lowering handle. This opens the 60 split door.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60 Split Door Release Handle
Once the 60 split swing door is opened, pull the
release handle on the inboard side of the
40 split door to open.
40 Split Door Release Handle
Closing
Always close the 40 split door first, then close
the 60 split door. The swing doors must be
securely latched before the tailgate can be
lowered.
NOTE:
When the swing doors are open, the
maximum load placed on a door cannot
exceed 180 lbs (82 kg).
Pull back on the swing doors firmly after
closing to ensure they are securely latched.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
below:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting
it off of the pivot.
Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always keep hands away from the hinge
sides of the swing doors and where the
doors meet when opening and closing the
doors. Your hand or someone else’s hand
could be pinched.
Never operate the vehicle with the swing
doors open.
Never hang from or sit on the swing doors.
CAUTION!
Always check both swing doors are latched
before starting vehicle.
Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not
securely latched.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to
nearly closed. Then, while providing support
to the tailgate, slide it slowly to the right,
removing the tailgate from the left pivot.
NOTE:
Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the
entire tailgate is secure and supported.
Slide Tailgate To The Right
4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables
while having the tailgate naturally slide
forward on the bumper.
Tailgate Only Supported By Cables
5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill
by pushing inward in the locking tab.
Connector Bracket Location
Locking Tab
WARNING!
For vehicles equipped with a multifunction
tailgate, the tailgate weighs 115 lbs (52 kg)
and should be removed by at least two
people. Injury to the customer or damage to
the tailgate may occur if one person tries to
remove the multifunction tailgate.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing
on the two release tabs, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
Connected Wiring Harness
Disconnected Body Side Harness
7. Connect the body side plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the body side wiring
harness and insert the bracket back into
the sill.
Body Side Plug (One Piece)
8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces)
9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket
against the forward-facing surface of the
tailgate. This will prevent damaging the
connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
1 — First Release Tab
2 — Second Release Tab
1 — Large Plug
2 — Small Plug
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the
support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a
second person when removing support cables.
Locking Tang
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness
disconnected, the tailgate can only be
opened by removing the inside panel and
unlatching the locking mechanism manually.
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
extendable bed step on the driver’s side of the
tailgate to provide easier entry and exit into the
truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of
the bed step, and push rearward. A small
amount of force will release the spring load, and
extend the bed step out and away from the
tailgate.
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step
will extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a
position that will avoid coming into contact with
the step as it extends.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate,
push the bed step forward with your foot until
the bed step is retracted by the spring load.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pick Up Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box,
you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement
Brackets that are available from an authorized
dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
Place lumber across the box in the indentations
provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who
should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when
operating a vehicle with unrestrained
cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that
may result in vehicle damage. If wide
building materials are to be frequently
carried, the installation of a support is
recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box
floor.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden
boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the
lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain
loads up to 1,000 lbs (450 kg) total.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing
cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down
in one of the detents, along either rail, in order
to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail,
turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately
three turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide
it to the detent nearest the desired location.
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs
(272 kg) of material suspended above the
wheelhouse, supports must be installed to
transfer the weight of the load to the pickup
box floor or vehicle damage may result. The
use of proper supports will permit loading up
to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward
in an accident causing serious or fatal
injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not
exceed 250 lbs (113 kg), or 500 lbs (227 kg)
total per rail, and the angle of the load on
each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees
above horizontal, or damage to the cleat or
cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide
the cleat forward to access the cut out at the
end of the box rail, then remove the cleat.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the
end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver.
Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap
while pulling the cap away from the rail. The
cleat can now be removed by sliding it off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system
consisting of three features:
Cargo storage bins
Cargo divider
Bed rail tie-down system Ú page 91
NOTE:
Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on
the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox Ú page 17. To unlatch
the storage bin manually, insert the emergency
key into the keyhole and turn clockwise. Always
return the key to the upright (vertical) position
before removing it from the keyhole.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of
the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up
to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox
unlocked, push and release the button located
on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Button And Keyhole Lock
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and
latched before moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid
should be minimized to prevent damage to
the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due
to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that
shift due to vehicle motion. In order to mini-
mize potential for damage, secure all cargo
to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects
with appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could
cause damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins
is properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lbs
(68 kg) per bin.
1 — Keyhole Lock
2 — Button
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. The timing
can be adjusted within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 237.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push plug
downward into drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)
inverter may be located inside the RamBox of
your vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by
the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch
located to the left of the steering wheel. The
RamBox inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is
only found on vehicles equipped with a
RamBox. The switch only controls on/off
operation of the power outlet in the RamBox; it
does not control on/off operation of the power
outlets located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of
time could cause the vehicle battery to dis-
charge. If the lid is required to stay open for
extended periods of time, it is recommended
that the bin lights be turned off manually
using the on/off switch.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Divider Position
Storage Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing
your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from
moving around the bed. There are 11 divider
slots along the bed inner panels which allow for
various positions to assist in managing your
cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if
the storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a
tie-down.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the
divider so the outboard ends align with the
intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to
secure the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage
position, perform the same steps as you would
for the divider position, except position the
divider fully forward in the bed against the front
panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front
of the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
CAMPER APPLICATIONS
Certain truck models are not recommended for
slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is
excluded, please refer to the “Consumer
Information Truck-Camper Loading” document
available online at ramtrucks.com. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this
document.
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL) must be provided.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on
the truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TONNEAU COVER COMPONENTS
Folded Tonneau Components
Tonneau Cover Latch Components
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
1 – Stowage Strap
2 – Tonneau Bumper Folded
1 — Handle
2 — Slide Locking Lever
3 — Locating Bumper
4 — Truck Flange Bead
5 — Latch Bumper
6 — J Hook
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage
Straps Secured)
Position Two (Front And Rear Latches Latched)
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER FOLDING
F
OR DRIVING OR REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover latches located on the
underside of the Cover.
Location Of Rear Latches
Slide Locking Lever Inward
2. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of
the truck bed to release the J Hook and pull
the handle downward into the released
position.
Unlatching Latch
1 — Panel 1
2 — Panel 2
3 — Panel 3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Released Position
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up
3. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the
opposite side latch.
Stowed Position
Lift Panel 3 And Fold Onto Panel 2
4. Lift up on Panel 3 and fold it onto Panel 2.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material. Fold the panel
gently. Do not allow the panels to drop under
their own weight.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lift up on the second and third panel and
fold them onto the first panel.
Stowage Strap Clipped
6. Unsnap the stowage strap and clip. Repeat
for both straps to prevent the tonneau cover
panels from unfolding.
Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage
Straps Secured)
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are
engaged, before removing.
Fully Folded Tonneau Cover
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven with the tonneau in
the folded position or can be completely
removed.
Slide Locking Lever Inward
7. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of
the truck bed to release the J Hook and pull
the handle downward into the released
position.
Unlatching Latch
CAUTION!
The folded tonneau cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage
straps or damage to the tonneau cover or
vehicle may occur. Damage could occur while
driving.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Released Position
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up
8. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 & 3 for the
opposite side latch.
9. With two people, remove the cover.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the Tonneau Cover on the truck
bed and center using the locating
bumpers.
2. Locate the front pair of Tonneau Cover
latches on the underside of the Cover. Slide
the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed and release the latch from the
stowed position, and pull the handle
downward into the released position. Do
this for both the left and right side.
Location of Front Latches
Slide Locking Lever Towards Inside Of Truck
Unlatching Latch
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Released Position
3. Swing the J Hook from the handle and push
the handle to the center and up, ensuring
that the J Hook is under the truck flange.
Push up on the handle firmly, locking it into
the latched position.
J Hook Under Truck Flange
NOTE:
Make sure the bumper is in front of the truck
flange bead.
Pull Handle Downward
4. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for
both the left and right side.
5. Unclip the stowage straps, and re-snap
them to the bow.
6. Unfold the Tonneau Cover to the second
panel position.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material. Fold the panel
gently. Do not allow the panels to drop under
their own weight.
Second Panel Position
1 — Front Of Truck
2 — J Hook
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
Unfold the panel gently, and do not allow the
panels to drop under their own weight.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Position Two (Fully Unfolded)
8. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the rear pair of
latches.
9. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for
both the left and right side.
NOTE:
Also check to ensure the bumper is forward of
the bead on the underside of the truck flange.
Make sure that the Tonneau Cover is positioned
fully forward, so that the bumper clears the
bead.
Pull Up On Tonneau Cover Corners
10. Gently pull up on all four corners of the
Tonneau Cover to ensure that it is properly
latched.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Ton-
neau Cover is in the second panel position.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the vehi-
cle/Tonneau Cover.
2
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Gasoline Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is
charged. If the pointer moves to either
extreme left or right and remains there
during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced
voltage may be present during an Autostop.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 114.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The display always show one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the oil
pressure when the engine is running. A
continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil
pressure indication of zero is normal during an
Autostop.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
7. Temperature Gauge
The pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 423.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Gasoline Premium Instrument Cluster Display
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 114.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The display always show one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 423.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Diesel Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving
in hot weather, up mountain grades, or in
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red
Warning Light turns on while driving,
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 114.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The display always show one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 423.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
7. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
DEF is required to maintain normal
vehicle operation and emissions compli-
ance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed Ú page 123.
NOTE:
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid to the DEF tank. If you
have a fault related to the DEF system, the
gauge may not update to the new level. See
an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
Outside temperature can affect DEF
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
can stay on a fixed position and may not
move for extended periods of time. This is a
normal function of the system.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Diesel Premium Instrument Cluster
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 114.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The display always show one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
5. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
DEF is required to maintain normal
vehicle operation and emissions compli-
ance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed Ú page 123.
NOTE:
The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge. You may
not see any movement in the reading – even
after driving up to 2,000 miles in some
cases.
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to
the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
Outside temperature can affect DEF
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
can stay on a fixed position and may not
move for extended periods of time. This is a
normal function of the system.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off-Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist (show/hide) — If Equipped
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Trip Info (show/hide)
Trailer Tow (show/hide) — If Equipped
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Set Up
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following instrument
cluster display control buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left /
right arrow buttons will loop the user
through the currently selected menu or
options presented on the screen.
Main menu and submenus wrap for contin-
uous scrolling.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
Pushing the OK button makes the selection
and a confirmation screen will appear
(returning the user to the first page of the
submenu).
Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and
numeric display will update to show 100%.
If conditions are not met a pop up message
of “To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to cycle the
display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Air Suspension — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Trans Temperature (Automatic only)
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Oil Life
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Engine Hours
Off-Road
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off-Road menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated
average front wheel angle from the
steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays
“Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,
4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle
in the graphic with the angle number on
the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to
display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the ACC and LaneSense systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the
current Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster Ú page 179.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met Ú page 137.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and hold the OK button to reset Average
Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right or left arrow button to
enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The
Trip A or Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold OK button to reset all
information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right or left arrow
button to cycle through the following trailer tow
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK
button to begin the Trailer Light Test
sequence Ú page 225.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instru-
ment Cluster Display will display the Trailer
Tire Pressure for a connected trailer with
sensors that match the active trailer profile.
When a low tire is present, the low tire value
will be displayed in red, and the affected low
tire will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will
be displayed on the center bottom of the
Instrument Cluster Display screen.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to cycle through
stored messages.
Settings
Head-Up Display (HUD)
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button until the HUD Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster
display.Push and release the OK button to enter
HUD. Use the up or down arrow button to
select a setting, then push and release the OK
button to adjust the setting.
ON/OFF
Content and Layout
Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion
Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane-
Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+),
Gear
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion
Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane-
Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+)
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane-
Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+),
Gear
Display Height
Brightness
NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 114.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
sub-menus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Settings feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
NOTE:
The Settings feature is only available when the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph.
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip – If Equipped
Trailer Brake – If Equipped
Oil Pressure – If Equipped
Coolant Temp – If Equipped
Oil Temperature – If Equipped
Battery Voltage – If Equipped
Transmission Temperature – If Equipped
Oil Life – If Equipped
Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip – If Equipped
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip – If Equipped
Trailer Brake – If Equipped
Oil Pressure – If Equipped
Coolant Temp – If Equipped
Oil Temperature – If Equipped
Battery Voltage – If Equipped
Transmission Temperature – If Equipped
Oil Life – If Equipped
Left Side – If Equipped
None
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Oil Temp
Transmission Temp
Coolant Temp
Oil Life
Menu Icon
Right Side – If Equipped
None
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Oil Temp
Transmission Temp
Coolant Temp
Oil Life
Menu Icon
Lower Left – If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Lower Right – If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (show/hide) – If Equipped
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop/Start
Trailer Tow (show/hide)
Audio (show/hide)
(Stored) Messages
Screen Setup
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
No Decimal Point
Decimal Point
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Cancel
Restore
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
or interaction on your part.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items that come
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine. Refer to the following
messages that may be displayed on your
instrument cluster:
Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy — This message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of
its maximum storage capacity. Under condi-
tions of exclusive short duration and low
speed driving cycles, your diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to cleanse the
filter to remove the trapped PM. If this
occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely
Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display. If this message is displayed,
you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition. By simply driving your
vehicle at highway speeds for up to
20 minutes, you can remedy the condition in
the particulate filter system and allow your
diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
system to cleanse the filter to remove the
trapped PM and restore the system to normal
operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — This message indi-
cates that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain
your current driving condition until regenera-
tion is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
— This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now
— This messages indicates regeneration has
been disabled due to a system malfunction.
At this point the engine Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) will register a fault code, the
instrument panel will display a MIL light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood
of permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and
a dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
To correct this condition it will be necessary
to have your vehicle serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the
diesel exhaust filter from performing it's
cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced
engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be
able to correct this condition.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
instrument cluster display displays the following
messages:
System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in
Park
System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in
Motion
Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds To Remedy
Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced See
Dealer
Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
Required See Dealer
Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
Refill Soon
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF
Service DEF System See Dealer
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See Dealer
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System
See Dealer
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
W
ARNING MESSAGES
Your vehicle will begin displaying warning
messages when the DEF level reaches a driving
range of approximately 500 miles (800 km). If
the following warning message sequence is
ignored, your vehicle may not restart unless DEF
is added with in the displayed mileage shown in
the cluster message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
Refill Soon — This message will display when
DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF
fluid top off is required within the displayed
mileage. The message will be displayed in the
cluster during vehicle start up with the
current allowed mileage and accompanied by
a single chime. The remaining mileage can
be pulled up anytime in the “Messages” list
within the instrument cluster display.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
— This message will display when DEF driving
range is less than 200 miles. It is also
displayed at 150 miles and 100 miles. DEF
fluid top off is required within the displayed
mileage. The message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display during vehicle
start up with an updated distance mileage,
and it will be accompanied by a single chime.
Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will
be continuously displayed while operating
the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the
75, 50 and 25 mile remaining distances. The
DEF Low telltale will be on continuously until
DEF fluid is topped off.
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This
message will display when the DEF driving
range is less than one mile, DEF fluid top off
is required or the engine will not restart. The
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display during vehicle start up, and it
will be accompanied by a single chime. The
DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continu-
ously until DEF fluid tank is filled with a
minimum of two gallons of DEF.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) FAULT
W
ARNING MESSAGES
There are different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected and each time the vehicle is
started. The message will be accompanied by
a single chime and the Malfunction Indicator
Light. We recommend you drive to the
nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately. If not corrected
in 50 miles, vehicle will enter the “Engine Will
not restart in XXX mi Service DEF See dealer”
warning stage and message.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display if the DEF system has
detected the incorrect fluid has been intro-
duced to the DEF tank. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. We recom-
mend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme-
diately. If not corrected in 30 miles, vehicle
will enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXX
mi Service DEF See dealer” warning stage
and message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See Dealer — This message is first displayed
if the fault detected is not serviced after
50 miles of operation. It is also displayed at
150 miles, 125 miles and 100 miles. System
service is required within the displayed
mileage. The message will be displayed
during vehicle start up with an updated
distance mileage, and it will be accompanied
by a single chime. Starting at 100 miles,
remaining range will be continuously
displayed while operating the vehicle.
Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and
25 mile remaining distances. We recom-
mend you drive to the nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme-
diately.
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System
See Dealer — This message will display if DEF
system issue detected is not serviced during
the allowed period. Your engine will not
restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an
authorized dealer. This message will be
displayed when under 1 mile until engine will
not start and each time the vehicle is started,
and will be continuously displayed. The
message will be accompanied by a single
chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will
be continuously illumined. We highly recom-
mend you drive to the nearest authorized
dealer if the message appears while engine
is running.
Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will display when the
fault detected is not serviced after the Engine
will not restart Service DEF System See
Dealer message is displayed on the next
subsequent restart. Your engine will not start
unless your vehicle is serviced by an autho-
rized dealer. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
Indicator Light will be continuously illumi-
nated. If the message appears and you can
not start the engine, we recommend having
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 128.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 334.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 389.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 174.
Tailgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the tailgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact an authorized dealer for
service Ú page 179.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension
system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level is less than a ¼
tank, and the Distance to Empty is
less than 50 miles, this light will turn
on and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate when a rear axle locker fault
has been detected.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the FCW System.
Contact an authorized dealer for
service Ú page 324.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the maximum payload
may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its
current ride height. Protection Mode will
automatically be selected to “protect” the air
suspension system, air suspension adjustment
is limited due to payload.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
has been activated Ú page 318.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the
headlight switch.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 1 setting Ú page 165.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 2 setting Ú page 165.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Normal setting Ú page 165.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting.
Entry/Exit Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle is automatically lowered from
ride height position downward for
easy entry and exit of the vehicle
Ú page 165.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a
higher ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a lower
ride height.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 161.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD High mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate
if the vehicle is low on Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) Ú page 211.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Its duration may be longer based on
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not
initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed
Ú page 146.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if
the intake manifold temperature is warm
enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
illuminate when there is water
detected in the fuel filter. If this light
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage, and please see an
authorized dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected
Ú page 179.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is
SET and there is no target vehicle
detected Ú page 179.
ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 199.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system
circuit may cause severe damage to the
injection system and irregular engine
operation. If the indicator light is illuminated,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to bleed the system. If the above
indications come on immediately after
refuelling, water has probably been poured
into the tank: switch the engine off
immediately and contact an authorized
dealer.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on
the side of the activated turn signal will also
illuminate to provide additional light when
turning.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Premium Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 177.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 175.
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mode, and the front axle is engaged,
but the vehicle's power is sent to the
rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction Ú page 161.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been
turned on but not set Ú page 179.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 177.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base/Midline Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 177.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case
is in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle
speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 199.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 236.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
GASOLINE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few
seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your
seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to
25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter
from overheating.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the OFF mode, key fob is
removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature
could result in evident white smoke. This condi-
tion will disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal
must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not
possible unless the Manual Park Release has
been activated Ú page 390.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least two
minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”
remains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filter to
avoid engine damage Ú page 412.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
message to not be seen. In these cases, the
gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and near the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON — GASOLINE
E
NGINE
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition will return to the OFF
mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
may AutoPark Ú page 141.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the ignition button/key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with
the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the
ignition button/key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON — DIESEL
E
NGINE
Observe the instrument panel telltales when
starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 386.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
NOTE:
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is
possible under very cold conditions. The "Wait
to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the
pre-heat process. When the engine “Wait To
Start” light goes off the engine will automati-
cally crank.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition will return to the OFF
mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
may AutoPark Ú page 141.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filter to avoid
engine damage Ú page 412.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING FLUIDS — DIESEL ENGINE
O
NLY
The engine is equipped with a glow plug
preheating system. If the instructions in this
manual are followed, the engine should start in
all conditions and no type of starting fluid
should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating.
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by
the glow plug heating system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module. Glow
plug heater operation can run for several
minutes, once the heater operation is complete
the voltmeter needle will stabilize.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
following charts suggest these options:
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build up may cause serious injury or
death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the wireless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions below (0°F/-18°C) exist.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number
1 ULSD Fuel results in a noticeable decrease
in fuel economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number
2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which
reduces the temperature at which wax crys-
tals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on
the pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel.
Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine
and exhaust system damage Ú page 471.
If Climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is
not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 475.
Winter Front Cover
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be
used in ambient temperatures below 32°F
(0°C), especially during extended idle
conditions. This cover is equipped with four
flaps for managing total grille opening in varying
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold
weather cover is to be used the flaps should be
in the full open position to allow air flow to the
cooling module and automatic transmission oil
cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below
0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A
suitable cold weather cover is available from a
Mopar dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
before full loads are applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because
combustion chamber temperatures can drop so
low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head
valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned
fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a
few minutes before shutting it down. This idle
period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
to carry excess heat away from the
turbocharger. Refer to the following chart for
proper engine shutdown.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run
after the engine is turned off. These conditions
are under high load and high temperature
conditions.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the low oil pressure warning light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when the light turns on.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much
oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Some important observations are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal
readings, shut the engine off immediately.
Failure to do so could result in immediate and
severe engine damage.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Engine Block Heater Cord Location
The engine block heater warms engine coolant
and permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault
interrupter protected 110–115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
For diesel engines, its use is recommended for
environments that routinely fall below -10°F
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has
not been running for long periods of time and
should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its
use is required for cold starts with temperatures
under -20°F (-28°C).
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle
next to the engine coolant reservoir.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 475.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal operation
is allowed, providing the following
recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for
prolonged periods.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera-
ture indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation will extend the time before
the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel
economy and power may be seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 475.
NOTE:
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient
and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake
switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect settings.
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
wheel (below the headlamp switch).
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake engages. Once the park brake is
fully engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the
BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, however,
it can only be released when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN mode.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition is ON, the transmission is in
DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN mode.
Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the
parking brake switch down momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake
disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once
the parking brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light
will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale
light flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
EPB system is required. Do not rely on the
parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be
programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer
programmable features section of the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 245.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if
all of the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch while the driver door is
open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to
the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system. Be sure the
parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode
through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle.
This menu based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
park brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the
instrument panel. The transmission gear range
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 159. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit,
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 159. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 231.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 392.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, an authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE and ERS
mode is not active. For example, if you set the
transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear
(except to prevent engine overspeed), but will
shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the transmission
gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the - button (on the
steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display
the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the - or + button will change
the top available gear.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the +
button until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in
conditions such as: driving in hilly areas, towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc. This mode
will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/
HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the
switch a second time restores normal
operation. Normal operation is always the
default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time
the engine is started.
1 — Shift Up (+)
2 — Shift Down (–)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle con-
trol, which may cause an accident possibly
resulting in personal injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
FOUR-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
S
HIFTED TRANSFER CASE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway
driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
This range provides torque to the front drive-
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same
speed. This provides additional traction for
loose or slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel
drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque
over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft;
allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 231.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low
positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
is to be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 231.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD High and 4WD Low) are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If the transfer case does not shift into the
desired position, one or more of the following
events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. If the transfer case will not shift, a message
will appear on the cluster stating the 4WD
shift has canceled.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 2WD or 4WD High positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Shifting Procedure
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met,
then the transfer case will not shift. The posi-
tion indicator light for the previous position
will remain on and the newly selected posi-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until
all the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, then
the current position indicator light will turn off
and the selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift. When the shift is complete, the position
indicator light for the selected position will
stop flashing and remain on.
FIVE-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
S
HIFTED TRANSFER CASE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides five mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway
driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range
(4WD AUTO) — This range sends power to the
front wheels automatically when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. This range may be
used during varying road conditions.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
This range provides torque to the front drive-
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same
speed. This provides additional traction for
loose or slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel
drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque
over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft;
allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 231.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is
located in the center of the 4WD Control
Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen
or similar object. The transfer case N
(Neutral) position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only Ú page 231.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD High, 4WD Low, and 4WD Auto) are
located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case
position, the indicator lights will do the
following:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If the transfer case does not shift into the
desired position, one or more of the following
events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will
be a cluster message stating the 4WD shift
has canceled.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 2WD, 4WD Auto or 4WD High positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met,
then the transfer case will not shift. The posi-
tion indicator light for the previous position
will remain on and the newly selected posi-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until
all the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, then
the current position indicator light will turn off
and the selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift. When the shift is complete, the position
indicator light for the selected position will
stop flashing and remain on.
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The air suspension system provides full time
load leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the
toggle switch.
Air Suspension Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
dard position of the suspension and is meant
for normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle
approximately 1 inch (26 mm)) – This posi-
tion should be the primary position for all
off-road driving until Off-Road 2 (OR2) is
needed. A smoother and more comfortable
ride will result. To enter OR1, push the
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer Se-
lectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator (Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer Select-
able)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
height selector switch up once from the NRH
position while the vehicle speed is below
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 posi-
tion, if the vehicle speed remains between
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the
vehicle will be automatically lowered to
NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster
message will be displayed when this occurs
Ú
page 114.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approx-
imately 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the height selector switch up
twice from the NRH position or once from the
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be avail-
able due to vehicle payload, an instrument
cluster message will be displayed when this
occurs Ú page 114.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the
vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode
if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero
Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or
if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph
(106 km/h).
Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only
apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
To enter Aero Mode manually push the height
selector switch down once from NRH at any
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the
height selector switch up once while vehicle
speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 114 or through your Uconnect
Radio if equipped Ú page 237.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
height selector switch down once from the
NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below
15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will
begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains
between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2
setting, be aware of your surroundings, you
may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
to Normal Height Mode, push the height
selector switch up once while in Entry/Exit or
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster
message will be displayed when this occurs
Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your
key fob for easier entry/loading Ú page 17.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all
user requested changes. When lowering the
vehicle, all of the doors must be closed. If a door
is opened at any time while the vehicle is
lowering, the change will not be completed until
the open door(s) is closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle,
the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly;
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper
appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 114.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 237.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations. The
engine should be running to change between
Air Suspension Modes.
Automatic AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle
into AERO height automatically Ú page 114.
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the Uconnect Radio (if
equipped) Ú page 237.
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 237.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
and disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 237.
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and
vehicle damage may occur.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this
mode must be enabled Ú page 237.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system,
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low,
etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as
soon as system operation requirements are
met. See an authorized dealer if system does
not resume.
NOTE:
For towing with air suspension Ú page 214.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 114.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a
system error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Air Suspension Switch
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate
to show the current position of the vehicle.
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position
which the system is working to achieve. When
raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing,
the highest flashing indicator lamp is the
position the system is working to achieve. When
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the
lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the
system is working to achieve.
Pushing the height selector up once will move
the suspension one position higher from the
current position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The
height selector switch can be pushed up
multiple times, each push will raise the
requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the height selector down once will
move the suspension one position lower from
the current level, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold,
etc). The height selector switch can be pushed
down multiple times, each push will lower the
requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested
changes.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3,
2 and 1 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in OR2.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4,
3 and 2 will be illuminated when the vehicle
is in OR1.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
5, 4 and 3 will be illuminated when the
vehicle is in this position.
Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this posi-
tion.
Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit
Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up
to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is
reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and
indicator lamp 5 will remain solid until
Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point
indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3,
4, and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The air suspension system provides full time
load leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the
toggle switch.
Rebel Air Suspension Controls
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
dard position of the suspension and is meant
for normal driving.
Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 inch (26 mm)) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR, push the height selector switch up
once from the NRH position while vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in
1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer selectable)
2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer se-
lectable)
3 — Aerodynamic Height Indicator (Customer Se-
lectable)
4 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer select-
able)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automat-
ically lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an instru-
ment cluster display message will be shown
when this occurs Ú page 114.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position
provides improved aerodynamics by
lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will auto-
matically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h)
and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return
to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero
Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h).
Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only
apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
To enter Aero Mode manually push the height
selector switch down once from NRH at any
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the
height selector switch up once while vehicle
speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled
through vehicle settings on your Uconnect
Radio.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 3 inches (73 mm)) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
height selector switch down twice from the
NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height
will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed
remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than
60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will
be canceled. To return to Normal Height
Mode, push the height selector switch up
twice while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode
may not be available due to vehicle payload,
an instrument cluster display message will
be shown when this occurs Ú page 114.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all
user requested changes. When lowering the
vehicle, all of the doors must be closed. If a door
is opened at any time while the vehicle is
lowering, the change will not be completed until
the open door(s) is closed.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware
of your surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and
vehicle damage may occur.
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and
vehicle damage may occur.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle,
the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly;
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper
appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 237.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 237.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle
into AERO height automatically Ú page 114.
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 237.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
and disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 237.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this
mode must be enabled Ú page 237.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system,
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low,
etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as
soon as system operation requirements are
met. See an authorized dealer if system does
not resume.
NOTE:
For towing with air suspension Ú page 214.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 114.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a
system error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
OPERATION
Air Suspension Switch
The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate
to show the current position of the vehicle.
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position
which the system is working to achieve. When
raising or lowering, the flashing indicator lamp
is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the height selector switch up once will
move the suspension one position higher from
the current position, assuming all conditions
are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The
height selector switch can be pushed up
multiple times, each push will raise the
requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the height selector switch down once
will move the suspension one position lower
from the current level, assuming all conditions
are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold,
etc). The height selector switch can be pushed
down multiple times, each push will lower the
requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested
changes.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2,
and 1 will be illuminated when the vehicle is
in OR1.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
4, 3, and 2 will be illuminated when the
vehicle is in this position.
Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this posi-
tion.
Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit
Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up
to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is
reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and
indicator lamp 4 will remain solid until
Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point
indicator lamp 3 will turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2,
3, and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically
locking rear differential. When engaged, this
differential locks the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. The locking of
the rear differential should only be engaged
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact
with the ground. It is not recommended to drive
the vehicle with the differentials locked on
pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and
speed limitations.
Axle Lock Button
The locking rear axle is controlled by the AXLE
LOCK button.
Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle
should be unlocked.
During the command to lock the rear axle, the
indicator light will flash until the axle is locked.
After the lock command has been successfully
executed, the light will remain on solid.
Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be
engaged up to 40 mph (64 km/h) and will
remain engaged throughout the 4WD LOW
speed range.
Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and
4WD LOCK/HIGH, the locker can be engaged up
to 20 mph (32 km/h). While driving with the
locker engaged, if speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h), the locker will automatically
disengage, but will automatically reengage at
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If
the indicator light is flashing after selecting the
rear axle lock mode, drive the vehicle in a turn
or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
The axle locker could become torque locked
due to side to side loads on the rear axle.
Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel
from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or
driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be
required to release the torque lock and unlock
the axles.
To unlock the rear axle; push the AXLE LOCK
button. The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out
when the rear axle is unlocked.
CAUTION!
Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is
reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
occur when the axle is locked on hard
surfaced roads.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle
is stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
damage drivetrain components. Lock the
rear axle before attempting situations or
navigating terrain, which could possibly
cause the vehicle to become stuck.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF
EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between
the traction characteristics of the surface under
the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential.
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear
wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both
rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight
application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface,
slight momentary application of the parking
brake may be necessary to gain maximum
traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear
wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
POWER STEERING
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance.
If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions
are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
few moments until the icon and message turn
off Ú page 114.
If the steering icon is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF”
message is displayed the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
When servicing vehicles equipped with a
limited-slip or locking differential never run
the engine with one rear wheel off the ground
since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and result in
unintended movement.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to save
fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or shifting out of DRIVE will
automatically restart the engine.
Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a
heavy duty motor generator and an additional
hybrid electric battery to store energy from
vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
after a stop as well as providing launch torque
assist.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. It will remain in
STOP/START NOT READY until you drive
forward with a vehicle speed greater than
2 mph (3 km/h). At that time, the system will
go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster
within the Stop/Start section
Ú
page 114.
2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.
3. The transmission gear selector must be in
DRIVE and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the stop/start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an
Autostop. While in an Autostop, the Climate
Controls system may automatically adjust
airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. In following situations, the
engine will not Autostop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
Engine temperature too high
The battery is charging
The transmission is not in DRIVE
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Accelerator pedal input
Excessive 12 Volt loads
It may be possible to operate the vehicle several
consecutive times in extreme conditions and
not meet all criteria to enable an Autostop state.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed and the transmission will automatically
reengage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode
The engine will start automatically when:
The transmission selector is moved from
DRIVE to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK
To maintain cabin temperature near the
HVAC settings
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
12 Volt demand requires engine restart
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
The emissions system override is present
A Stop/Start system error present
Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To
Park While In Autostop Mode
The engine will not start automatically and the
transmission will be placed in PARK if:
The driver door is open and brake pedal
released
The driver door is open and the driver seat
belt is unbuckled
The engine hood has been opened
A Stop/Start system error present
The engine may then be restarted by moving the
transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to
DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a KEY START.
The instrument cluster will display a SHIFT OUT
OF PARK message, or a STOP/START KEY
START REQUIRED message, to indicate which
action is required Ú page 114.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 114.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 126.
The system will need to be checked by an
authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — On/Off
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always ensure the
system is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
(Continued)
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed
from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 177.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your speed.
ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the Adaptive Cruise Control
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring your vehicle to a complete
stop while following a vehicle ahead
and hold your vehicle for approximately
three minutes in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving
within three minutes the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake system (ABS) activates
The trailer brake is applied manually (if
equipped)
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not
activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have to
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one
bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged, and following a vehicle, the system
will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when
the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will
only be active when passing on the left hand
side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front,
your vehicle will resume motion without any
diver intervention if the vehicle in front starts
moving within two seconds.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the camera in the center of
the windshield, on the forward side of the
rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure
or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog
on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has
no obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no
vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
of the curve the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary
Ú page 482.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with the
automatic braking function, the vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released
when the vehicle is in REVERSE if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes will not be available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC
is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false
braking events if left attached after towing.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
For limitations of this system and usage
precautions, see Ú page 194.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled while in one of these gears, the system
will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. A warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors (six if equipped
with Active Parksense), located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view,
and the four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm). These distances depend
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 114. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left, right, or center
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left, right, or
center regions, the display will show a single arc
in the left and/or right regions and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
slow, to fast, to continuous.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Medium Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 114 will show a vehicle
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off
state for two seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic with “OFF” on the corresponding side.
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,
will interrupt the five second messages, and the
instrument cluster display will show the vehicle
graphic with the corresponding arcs and “OFF”
message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "WIPE OFF"
message on the corresponding blocked system
while the vehicle is in REVERSE. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing
weather may also cause sensors to become
blocked.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/
bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
debris to keep the ParkSense system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off,
the instrument cluster display will show a
vehicle graphic of the Front or Rear Park-
Sense on/off state for two seconds. Further-
more, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense
off, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park-
Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster
display will show a vehicle graphic with "OFF"
in the corresponding side. This vehicle
graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed near
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be appear in the
instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tail-
gate is in the lowered or open position. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle
and could also cause a false braking event.
The Rear ParkSense system will automati-
cally disable when the system detects that a
trailer with trailer brakes has been connected
to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
The Front ParkSense system will automati-
cally disable if a snow plow has been
connected to the vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, and give a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle, and could cause false braking.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature.
The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes.
The automatic emergency braking feature is
NOT intended to substitute for the driver
during REVERSE maneuvers.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch
Uconnect display, the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch is located above the display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space.
Steering wheel is touched during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed.
Driver's door is opened.
Tailgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
activated.
Driver's door is closed.
Tailgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If
the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the messages “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK To Switch To Perpendicular
Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK
to Switch to Parallel Park” will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Push the OK button
on the left side of the steering wheel to change
your parking space setting. You can switch
between perpendicular and parallel parking
maneuvers.
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendic-
ular (depending on the type of maneuver) to
other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver). A parking
space is considered invalid after the vehicle
is 32 ft (10 m) or more away from it.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver
being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your
hands still removed from the steering wheel),
you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait
for steering to complete before then instructing
to check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear
shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of
the steering wheel, before instructing the driver
to check surroundings and complete the
parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The
message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within eight shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button
is located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the visual warning in the
instrument cluster display will show the left
lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yel-
low Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines
Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both
the lane markings have been detected, the
system is "armed" to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs .The lane lines
turn from gray to white and the LaneSense
telltale is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow
Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late)
that you can configure through the Uconnect
system Ú page 237.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in
the center of the tailgate handle.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Back Up Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the following conditions occur: The
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the user
presses image defeat “X” to exit out of the
camera video display.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Back Up Camera" button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected back up path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following
table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View
is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Back Up
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the
touchscreen.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing
the Backup Camera or Surround View Camera
(if equipped) button on the touchscreen,
followed by the AUX button located in the upper
left corner of the rearview display. The AUX
camera can also be activated when the vehicle
is in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Surround View Camera system allows you
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs
whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE or
when enabled through the Uconnect system.
The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any
doors are open. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings”. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four
cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 237.
Press this button on the touchscreen
to enter the Surround View Camera
menu in the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
Rear View and Top View is the default view of
the system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera
image will display for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE. The camera image will
not display for 10 seconds if the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The “X” button on the touchscreen
disables the display of the camera image.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera
image will close and display the previous screen
after shifting out of REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
overlaid on the image in the Rear View to
illustrate the width of the vehicle. The view will
also include the side view mirrors and its
projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position.
There are different colored zones to indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the
chart below:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated
by selecting “Back Up Camera” through the
Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system
with Rear View and Front View in a split screen
display. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be seen in the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
The Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will block the outside
image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle with
optional active guidelines for the
projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View
of the vehicle.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key
will provide a full screen rear view with
Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected
through the Surround View Camera menu,
exiting out of the Rear View screen will return to
the Surround View menu. If the Back Up Camera
was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View
is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Back Up
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
There is a touchscreen button “X” to disable
the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last
known screen appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via Surround View
button or Back Up Camera button:
The “X” button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera is activated manu-
ally, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
deactivation methods for automatic activation
are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect settings menu
Ú page 237.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If
Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front
view image of the road ahead, along with tire
lines to guide the driver when driving on narrow
roads. Tire lines can be activated/deactivated
through the Uconnect settings.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in
the following ways:
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
in the Controls screen or Apps menu
Pressing the Backup Camera or Surround
View Camera button (if equipped) on the
touchscreen, followed by the AUX button
located in the upper left corner of the rear-
view display
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
while the vehicle is in REVERSE
Once activated, the camera image will remain
on as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low.
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in
the following conditions:
The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10
seconds.
The “X” button on the display is pressed.
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the “X”
button is pressed or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display images from the
trailer on the touchscreen.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated any of the
following ways:
By first pressing the Backup Camera or
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button
on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX
button located in the upper left corner of the
rearview display
Pressing the AUX button in the Apps menu
Pressing the AUX button when the vehicle is
in REVERSE
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated when the
following situations occur:
The “X” in the upper right corner of the touch-
screen is pressed. This will return the display
back to the previously displayed screen.
The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h)
for 10 seconds.
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side
of the vehicle.
The capless system is sealed by two flapper
doors.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler
door (3 o'clock position) and release to
open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper
doors while refueling.
Fuel Filler
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the
fuel filler door and then release. The fuel
filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel filler door around the
perimeter to break the ice build up.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flam-
mable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side
of the vehicle.
The capless system is sealed by two flapper
doors.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel
system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
filter and fuel tank is essential Ú page 409.
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good
maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential.
Fuel contaminated with water will promote the
growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system
and lines. Drain condensation from the supply
tank and change the line filter on a regular
basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start Ú page 414.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet diesel
emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of oxides of nitrogen (NO
x
) emitted from
engines that are harmful to our health and the
environment to a near-zero level. A small
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst
where, when vaporized, converts smog-forming
NO
x
into harmless nitrogen (N
2
) and water
vapor (H
2
O), two natural components of the air
we breathe.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID STORAGE
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
year.
DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below
12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to
operate in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know
that:
Any containers or parts that come into
contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should
be avoided as they are subject to corrosion
by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
ADDING DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located
on the instrument cluster) will display the level
of DEF remaining in the tank Ú page 109.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
Outside temperature can affect DEF
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge may take
longer to operate as intended. This is a
normal function of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF
tank that automatically works when neces-
sary. And if the DEF supply does freeze, the
truck will operate normally until it thaws.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 475.
1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) tank which is located next to the
diesel fuel filler.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank
filler neck.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
(DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault
related to the DEF system, the gauge may not
update to the new level. See an authorized
dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first
shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the
DEF tank is full). Do not proceed with the
refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label
before pouring the content of the bottle
into the DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in
(e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the
indication appears on the instrument
panel display Ú page 114 fill the DEF
tank with no more than 2 Gallons (8
liters).
If containers which can be screwed to the
filler are used, the reservoir is full when
the DEF level in the container stops
pouring out. Do not proceed further.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
to work in temperatures below the DEF
freezing point, however, if the tank is over-
filled and freezes, the system could be
damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
diately with water and use an absorbent
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
as it can result in severe damage to your
engine, including but not limited to failure
of the fuel pump and injectors.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when
any of the following happen: DEF stops
flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF tank,
DEF splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF
pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures
below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in
operation for an extended period of time with
temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in
the tank may freeze. Do not overfill the DEF
tank. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it
could be damaged.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Keep an
eye on the DEF gauge in your instrument
cluster. You may safely add a maximum of
2 gallons (7.6 Liters) when your DEF gauge is
reading at the half mark.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of these,
less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam-
inate the entire DEF system and will require
replacement. If owners use a container,
funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it
should either be new or one that is has only
been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this
purpose.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load
is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must
be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items
down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 213.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its “loaded and ready for
operation” condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 213.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a weight-dis-
tributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying
hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and
cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehi-
cle and have a collision.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With Air Suspension — If Equipped
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run posi-
tion with all doors closed while attaching a
trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension
system.
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. Enable tire jack mode through the
instrument cluster or touchscreen radio
settings. Tire jack mode will be canceled
and procedure must be restarted if the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph
(8 km/h).
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result
in a collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this
is height H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per FCA recommendations
so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3
the difference between H2 and H1 above
normal ride height [H1]).
8. Use the instrument cluster or touchscreen
radio settings and switch off tire jack mode.
Make sure the truck returns to normal ride
height. Perform a visual inspection of the
trailer and weight distributing hitch to
confirm FCA recommendations have been
met.
9. The truck can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Measurement
Example
Example Height
(mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/3 7
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally
installed on your vehicle.
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
Remove the cap with a trim stick or screw driver
to access the Class III hitch attachment.
NOTE:
Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 12,750 lbs (5,783 kg) / 1,275 lbs (578 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TRAILER REVERSE STEERING CONTROL
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a
feature that will allow the driver to back up a
trailer using a knob located on the center stack.
The feature works by the user first hooking up a
trailer and then performing the calibration
maneuvers.
Calibration:
First bring the vehicle and trailer to a complete
stop in a large open area, place the vehicle in
PARK and push the TRSC button located above
the knob in the center stack.
To calibrate a trailer, the driver must drive
forward 100 ft (30 m). Then perform a 90
degree turn and return to a straight position for
65 ft (20 m). Perform another 90 degree turn,
followed by another 65 ft (20 m) straight drive.
Upon completion this the feature will be
available to activate.
NOTE:
The 90 degree turns could be in either the left
or right direction.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
CAUTION!
Always observe the position of the trailer and
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to
avoid damage to the truck or trailer.
1 — Straight 100 ft (30 m)
2 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction
3 — Straight 50 ft (15 m)
4 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction
5 — Straight 50 ft (15 m)
6 — Straight 65 ft (20 m), making sure to align ve-
hicle/trailer to path center line
7 — Feature is active, turn knob left or right to
back the trailer up
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once calibrated the driver can shift to PARK,
push the button on top of the TRSC knob and
activate the feature. The knob is then turned
either to the left or right depending on what
direction the driver wants the trailer to go.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob
NOTE:
When steering the trailer with the knob, remove
hands from the steering wheel.
There is also a holdover state where if during an
active trailer steering maneuver, the driver
shifts to NEURAL or DRIVE to straighten the
trailer, the driver may shift back to REVERSE
and not need to reactivate the feature. However
the feature will cancel after 10 seconds or when
the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph (12 km/h).
Instrument Cluster Messages:
“Drive forward to calibrate trailer” will display
when a trailer is not calibrated and the
vehicle is at standstill while the button is
pushed.
“Calibrating trailer” will display when the
trailer is not calibrated and the vehicle is
moving while the button is pushed.
“To activate trailer steering shift to P” will
display when the trailer is calibrated success-
fully and the vehicle is not in PARK.
“Trailer Steering ready, shift to reverse” will
display when the button is pushed, trailer is
calibrated and the vehicle is in PARK.
“Trailer steering active” will display after the
driver shifts to REVERSE and indicates the
feature is active.
“Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if
there is a fault in the system preventing acti-
vation, the driver’s door is open, the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, or the tailgate is open.
Other reasons the feature may cancel:
The driver overrides steering by placing
hands on the steering wheel.
Trailer tracking is lost.
If the trailer angle becomes excessive, the
brakes apply bringing the vehicle to a stop
and then applying the parking brake.
Trailer steering button is pushed while active.
Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h).
Driver door is open and seat belt is
unbuckled.
Transmission shifted to PARK.
Trailer Memory
The trailer steering system can remember up to
five trailers, so recalibration will not be
necessary.
To store a trailer to memory, calibrate the trailer
and then allow the vehicle to be off for a period
of time. The next time the vehicle is started,
place the vehicle in DRIVE and drive a short
distance. The trailer system can then be
activated.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
(Continued)
NOTE:
Trailers may look different during day and night
conditions. In such cases, the trailer may need
to recalibrate.
Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to
recalibrate while loaded and unloaded.
NOTE:
The system may not detect a trailer in low
light conditions. In sunny conditions, the
performance may be degraded as shadows
pass over the trailer.
The driver is always responsible for safe oper-
ation of truck and trailer.
The driver is always in control of the truck as
well as the trailer and is responsible for
controlling the throttle and brakes.
The system may not function when the
camera lens is blocked, blurred (covered with
water, snow, ice, dirt, etc) and will not work
unless the tailgate is upright and fully
latched.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
Scheduled Servicing section for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 395. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 443.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new EOH
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not
be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to
a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions
change. Changes to towing conditions include
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will
come on when braking normally with the vehicle
brake pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will
come on when the manual brake control lever is
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for
10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
1 — GAIN (-) Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN (+) Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer is plugged in with electric or
EOH brakes, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the instrument cluster display
options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
*The suggested selection may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer Ú page 114.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or elec-
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with
your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See
your authorized dealer if an aftermarket
module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin
and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must connect the harness to
a trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
available in the Instrument Cluster under the
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 118.
When activated the feature will enable all of the
exterior lights sequentially for up to two minutes
for time to walk around and verify functionality.
The following exterior lights will remain on for
the entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will
sequence, each activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
This light check sequence will continue for a
total of two minutes.
The sequence will only activate if the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition in ACC or RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument
cluster
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the (ERS) shift control) on more
severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from
the vehicle, the air suspension system can be
used Ú page 165.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a
factory installed option. These packages
include components necessary to equip your
vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain
and follow the recommendations contained
within the current Body Builders Guide. See an
authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manu-
facturer for this information. There are unique
electrical systems that must be connected to
properly ensure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and
proper fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for
excessive wear. The cutting edge should be
¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground
in snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected
and functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications
visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current
Body Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR, Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the
addition of options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the
snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories,
driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must
not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.
These weights are specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label on the driver's
side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without
consideration for the weight of the plow. Front
end toe-in should be checked and reset if
necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven
tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the
vehicle is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and
snowplow equipment following the
recommendations provided by the specific
snowplow manufacturer.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or
surface conditions permit. Do not exceed
40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always
maintain a safe stopping distance and allow
adequate passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating
speed. The operator should be familiar with the
area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed
and use extreme caution when plowing
unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in
accordance with the plow manufacturer's
instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed:
Operate with transfer case in 4WD Low when
plowing small or congested areas where
speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4WD
High.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions
should use 4WD Low when plowing deep or
heavy snow for extended periods of time to
avoid transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the
engine has returned to idle and wheels have
stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the
brake pedal while shifting the transmission.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four
Corner Air Suspension must be placed in
Transport mode before tying them down
(from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
Ú page 165. If the vehicle cannot be placed
in Transport mode (for example, engine will
not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the
axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these
instructions may cause fault codes to be set
and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
(Continued)
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(Neutral) for recreational towing. The transmis-
sion must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer
case must be in N (Neutral). To be certain
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral),
perform the procedure outlined under
“Shifting Into N (Neutral)”. Internal trans-
mission damage will result, if the transfer
case is not in N (Neutral) during towing.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The
driver's door must be closed (or the driver's
seat belt buckled) so that the transmission
will remain in NEUTRAL when the brake
pedal is released.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(Neutral) button (at the center of the
transfer case switches). The N (Neutral)
indicator light will illuminate, and remain lit,
when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
After the shift is completed and the N
(Neutral) light stays on, release the N
(Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission
in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply
the parking brake. Turn off the engine. For
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and
hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine shuts off. The transmission will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
10. Turn the ignition off.
11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be cer-
tain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neu-
tral) before recreational towing to prevent
damage to internal parts.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
NOTE:
Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift,
the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash contin-
uously until all requirements are met or until
the N (Neutral) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
the engine should be started and left running
for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours.
This process allows the air suspension to
adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compen-
sate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(Neutral) button (at the center of the
transfer case switches).
5. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns
off, release the N (Neutral) button.
6. Turn the engine off. The transmission will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
7. Release the brake pedal.
8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Start the engine.
11. Release the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Cautions and Warnings before doing
so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sud-
den pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a col-
lision. Accelerate slowly and carefully when-
ever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning
the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
4
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system or your
Uconnect 4C NAV with 12-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information and
private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or Ú page 137.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen
And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme — If Equipped This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Keyboard — If Equipped
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard, QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY
Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If Equipped
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups — If Equipped
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Camera — If Equipped
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Descriptions
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
shifting out of reverse.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera active guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera fixed guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Descriptions
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available setting are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turned the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The
“Max” setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers — If Equipped
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Step — If Equipped
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The
available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps
or “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
options are “On” or “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
When the Power Side Steps button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display setting related to the lowering of the power side steps.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
Passive Entry — If Equipped
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The
available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps
and “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the
engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Suspension/Air Suspension — If Equipped
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The
“Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode
This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches — If Equipped
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment.
Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a
spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being
flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a
wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or
from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you
can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or
“Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and
the power source is set to Ignition.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from Trailer 1, Trailer 2, Trailer 3, and Trailer 4. These trailer
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available
options are “Light Electrics”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light
Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of
trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list:
trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse,
livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound — If Equipped This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the instrument
cluster display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
are Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
HEAD-UP DISPLAY (HUD)
The Head-Up Display layout on the instrument
cluster can be customized through the
Uconnect touchscreen. Each customized layout
can be saved to the Driver Profiles that are
created by the different drivers.
This feature is only accessed through the
instrument cluster display once the “Custom”
option is selected through the “Content &
Layout” tab. To begin customizing the HUD
layout through the instrument cluster display,
follow these steps:
1. Through the instrument cluster display,
using the Up and Down Arrow buttons on
the steering wheel, select the Content &
Layout option by pressing the OK button on
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
This option will not be available if the vehicle is
going more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
2. Select the Custom option by pushing the
Right Arrow button on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
A message will appear on the instrument cluster
display stating “Set Custom Layout in Radio”.
On the Uconnect touchscreen, you can select
between four different custom layouts: Two
icons, Three icons, Four icons, and Five icons.
Press the Right or Left Arrow buttons, or the
dots towards the bottom of the screen, to
change your layout.
With your desired layout selected, you can drag
and drop the available icons into the desired
zones to customize the layout of your display.
HUD Layout
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
The following are the available icons that can be customized in the cluster:
NOTE:
After the HUD layout customization is completed, press the Save button located in the upper left corner of the touchscreen, and then the OK button
under the “Save changes?” screen. Once saved, the instrument cluster will display a message “Setting Saved”.
Press the X button located in the upper right corner of the touchscreen, and then press the Cancel button to exit out of customizing the HUD layout.
Doing this will not retain any information customized in the layout view. The instrument cluster display will return to the layout options screen.
Pressing any other menu item on the touchscreen, for example “Climate”, will take the user back to whatever screen they were previously on before
accessing the HUD layout Ú page 118.
Feature Name Icon Description
Speed This icon will show the vehicle’s current speed.
Turn-By-Turn — If Equipped
This icon will show the upcoming direction for
Navigation.
Speed Limit
This icon will show the current speed limit of the
area you are driving in.
Driver Assist/Adaptive Cruise Control/Cruise
Control And Lane Sense — If Equipped
This icon will show information related to Driver
Assist, Adaptive Cruise Control, Cruise Control,
and Lane Sense.
Gear
This icon will show the current gear the vehicle
is in.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Compass Button
3 — Media Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — Phone Button
6 — More Button
7 — Volume & On/Off
8 — Mute Button
9 — Screen Off Button
10 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 259.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 271.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 482.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Tune
7 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
8 — Seek Down
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button
again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by pressing the
Media button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at
the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, push the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 271.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or pushing the Media
button on the faceplate and then selecting the
Source button and then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up / Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate
the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the
device. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 259.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or Phone button on the radio
faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used.
Until then, if available, the previously down-
loaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Ignore
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
button the Phone main screen to combine all
calls into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 482.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are
connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you
have a connected radio and can take
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and
SOS buttons Ú page 373.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 306.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
And Business Hours
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call
1-877-324-9091
Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to comply may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which
can limit the ability to reach the response
center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings,
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical
system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the govern-
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
ground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by
using the Uconnect App or your computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email
address to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
Uconnect Mobile App
Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password
to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
1 — Settings
2 — Vehicle Info
3 —Remote Commands
4 — Location And Send & Go
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your
account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the
confirmation email. It may take a short
time before remote services will be avail-
able, but you will be able to log into the
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle
Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US
Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information
you need, all in one place. You can track your
service history, find recommended accessories
for your vehicle, watch videos about your
vehicle's features, and easily access your
manuals. It is also where you can manage your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This section will
familiarize you with the key elements of the
website that will help you get the most of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
For customers in the United States, press the
Sign In/Register button and enter your email
address and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
then prompt you to log-in using your email
address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail
to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a
minor collision, medical or any other emergency,
press the SOS button to be connected to a call
center agent who can send emergency
assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
cellular network availability that is compatible
with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call will NOT work without a network
connection compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which is
not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
(Continued)
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER
FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCON-
NECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM
GUARDIAN™ SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part
of the air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services if
needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands
Remote Commands lets you send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
1 — Lock
Press this button to
lock your vehicle.
2 — Unlock
Press this button to
unlock your vehicle.
3 — Vehicle Start
Press this button to
start your vehicle.
4 — Cancel Vehicle
Start
Press this button to
cancel remote start.
5 — Horn & Lights
Press this button to
sound the horn and
activate your lights.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command to by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to
activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been
armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are
closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank
of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
services have been activated, the ASSIST
button can connect you directly to customer
care call centers. You will be directed to one of
the four services below.
Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
answering any general questions
surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
options on the touchscreen. Make your
selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
Vehicle Finder Send & Go Input
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
These options will appear:
Vehicle Finder Layers
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an
internet access hotspot in the vehicle,
using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
How To Purchase button and follow the
instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers:
Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist
you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
view the connected devices from the app
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the 4G
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the
Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”
menu button on your device, select “Help”,
and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when
it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or to
alert you of other important information, such
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 283.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™
Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
Skill on Alexa®!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™
phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
speakers, like Google Home. If you need
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
account by pressing the icon in the upper
right hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you
activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your
vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
place food orders, or pay for other goods and
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
To get started with Uconnect Market on the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
App drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect
Market.
NOTE:
If the text message does not come through,
press the Resend Text button. It might take a
minute to receive the text message.
4. Once you receive the text message, press
the link provided. You will be directed to a
Sign-in screen. Enter your email and
password. You will now be able to use
Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press
“Register Now” to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and
press “Next”.
8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”.
9. The system will verifying the phone number.
Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal, https://
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
accounts and start receiving benefits from them
while still using Uconnect Market and view your
purchase history.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call
button to cancel the call. To cancel the call,
either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription to find out
if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account? There are three ways
that you can register your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be
placed to an agent who can assist in
registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Select the button to speak
with an agent, who can assist in regis-
tering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill
out your information and accept Terms
and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
complete your profile and demo the
remote services.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
tification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
entire subscription? Prorated refunds are
provided from the date of cancellation for
annual plans or longer. Please see the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circum-
stances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network.
Services that required your smartphone
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call
may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits
data which may include information about your
vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance,
your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data. The
collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
services and is further described by the
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle
Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages which display vehicle information related
to the drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil
gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the three selectable page options. It
provides information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s transfer
case and steering angel.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll
gauge provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Front Axle Locker Status
3 — Steering Angle
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s suspension system and
the current ride height of the vehicle. The
Suspension page will also indicate when the
vehicle’s height changes.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 482.
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Height Status
5
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application, and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The ERM system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When
ERM determines that the rate of change of the
steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects
or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
(Continued)
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode, the ESC system will be on even if
it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with
throttle or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
Ú page 237.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Control System will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 214.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator
lamps when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
taillights with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the taillights around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the
blockage, the following procedure can be used
to reset the system:
Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back
ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The system may also detect a blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low
radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors, in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume Ú page 322.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 482.
Opposing Traffic
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring
functions when pulling a trailer Ú page 322.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic, and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM,
RCP, or Trailer Merge Assist systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
Trailer Merge Assist – If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the
blind spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear
Cross Path is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the
detection of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
a trailer will be detected using the blind spot
radar within 90 seconds of forward move-
ment of the vehicle. The vehicle must be
moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate
the feature. Once the trailer has been
detected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone until the length has
been verified. You will see “Auto” in the
instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this
setting, it must be selected through the
Uconnect settings Ú page 237.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making
a 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is
at a standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a
new “trailer detection request” is enabled by
the system once the vehicle resumes motion.
Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
considered the forward most portion of the
trailer hitch to the rearward most portion of the
body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
measured at the widest portion of the trailer
and may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not
supported by Trailer Merge Assist.
NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking
lots, narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any
other crowded area may prevent the radar
sensors from being able to adequately detect
the trailer. The system will try to detect a trailer
at every ignition cycle or 90 seconds of stand-
still.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into
one of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot
zone will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to
6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
30 ft (9 m) .
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Width
3 — Trailer Hitch
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m
to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
Max distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m)
of actual length. Trailers that are the same size
as the category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m),
could be subject to being placed in the category
above or below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the
blind spot function to cover the length of the
trailer, plus a safety margin, to warn the driver
when there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane. The
driver is alerted by the illumination of the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirror on
the side the other vehicle is detected on. In
addition, an audible (chime) alert will be heard
and radio volume will be reduced Ú page 322.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT
alert the driver about rapidly approaching
vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror warning indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neigh-
borhoods, etc. may lead to an increased
amount of false alerts. This is normal opera-
tion.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 482.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings Ú page 237.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full
On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On”
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 237.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available. Once
the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that
provides the driver with audible and visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display, and
may apply automatic braking when it detects a
potential frontal collision with a pedestrian.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a
pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. When the system determines a collision
with the pedestrian in front of you is no longer
probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows
the system to warn you of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect
display in the controls settings Ú page 237.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
The system will reset to the default setting when
the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message; when this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can PEB detect every type of potential colli-
sion with a pedestrian. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by con-
trolling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 443 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire Ú page 482.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light
illuminates, increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure,
unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill
Alert (TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will
also be displayed.
Low Tire Pressure Display
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return to its original color, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPMS SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPMS
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System sensors
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
TPMS sensor location condition. When a system
fault occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable message
in place of the tire pressure display screen. If
the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” will
no longer flash and the tire pressure display
screen will be displayed showing the tire
pressure values the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE”
message will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instru-
ment cluster will still display a pressure value
in a different color and an “Inflate to XX”
message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPMS
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPMS SYSTEM" message
for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Warning Light will turn off and
the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
You may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the Uconnect
Settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if
the system is in deactivation mode (if
equipped).
The system will be activated when a positive
increase in tire pressure is detected by the
TPMS while inflating the tire. The ignition must
be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be out of
range preventing the TPMS sensor signal from
being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved either forward or backward
slightly to exit the null spot.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
Operation:
The horn will sound once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will sound three times if the tire is
overfilled and will continue to sound every
five seconds if the user continues to inflate
the tire.
The horn will sound once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also sound three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
sound every five seconds if the user
continues to deflate the tire.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low
tire pressure event based on the drivers set
target tire pressure value, through TTPMS
settings found in the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire
and warns the driver through the instrument
cluster, when either a low tire pressure
condition falls below 25% of the drivers set
pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The
instrument cluster will display the actual tire
pressure or dashes for each of the trailer tires in
the correct trailer position, based on trailer
configuration. The TTPMS can support up to
12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to
four configurable trailers Ú page 237.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire
pressure sensors must be installed in the
desired trailer tires and the sensors must be
paired to the truck. If the target trailer requires
more than the provided four sensors, additional
sensors can be purchased at an authorized
Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near
or connected to your Ram truck, initiate the
pairing process by entering the settings menu in
the radio and selecting trailer. Select the
desired trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire
Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires”
Ú page 237.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
Follow the on screen prompts to select the
number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer
tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire
pressure. The range is selectable anywhere
between 25-125 PSI (172-862 kPa).
Once PSI (kPa) is programmed, the pairing
screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in
order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by
5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may
take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur,
indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat
process on each tire, in order, until complete.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is
complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double
horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the
touchscreen will allow you to retry the
procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired
during a single pairing process to receive the
success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three
minutes of no communication with a sensor, a
double horn chip will occur indicating the
pairing has failed and a message will display on
the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
cessful. Under certain circumstances, the
double horn chirp may continue to happen
every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may
be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF
and then back to RUN position.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the
active road tires is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a message stating “Trailer
Tire Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will
then display the TTPMS graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
programmed target tire pressure value as
shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument
cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the
system will automatically update the graphic
display in the instrument cluster, returning to its
original color. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TTPMS to receive the updated
information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure
System Service Required” message for a
minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer
Tire Pressure System Service Required"
message will no longer be displayed. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure
information.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SAFETY
Trailer Tire Pres sure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster
graphic when a trailer number is selected that
has not had trailer tire pressure sensors paired.
To correct this condition, see Ú page 237.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors
being received by the TTPMS module do not
match the trailer sensors paired to the current
trailer number selected. This message will be
displayed when the sensors being received
completely match the sensors paired to another
trailer number configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer
number must be selected in the radio
Ú page 237.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 355.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 355.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SAFETY 335
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 479 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SAFETY
(Continued)
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SAFETY 337
(Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SAFETY 339
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SAFETY 341
(Continued)
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 364. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SAFETY 343
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 126.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SAFETY
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SAFETY 345
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SAFETY
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SAFETY 347
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SAFETY
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SAFETY 349
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SAFETY
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SAFETY 351
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SAFETY
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SAFETY 353
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SAFETY 355
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SAFETY
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SAFETY 357
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SAFETY
(Continued)
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SAFETY 359
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which
may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench And 60/40
Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SAFETY 361
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No
Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat
belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Outboard Tether Anchorage
Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear
Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages
Available
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint
Ú page 363.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SAFETY 363
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 364 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 366 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint
Ú page 363.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 341 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SAFETY 365
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap
Ú page 366.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
The top tether anchorages in this
vehicle are tether strap loops located
between the rear glass and the back
of the rear seat. There is a tether
strap loop located behind each seating position.
Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap
of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear
glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, through the space
between the head restraint and the seat
back, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop
behind the center seat.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SAFETY 367
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the
space between the head restraint and the
seat back behind the child seat, through the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
(left and right) seating positions, the tether
strap hooks of both child seats should be
connected to the center tether strap loop. This
is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear
glass to access the tether strap loop.
Center Tether Strap Loop Location
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back and headrest, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and
over to the tether strap loop behind either
the right or left outboard seat.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the
headrest behind the child seat, through the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And At-
tached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard
rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following the
directions for the center seating position,
above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
before the center tether strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SAFETY 369
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
See Ú page 334 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SAFETY 371
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
6
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SAFETY
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
373
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the upper switch bank just below the radio.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers
switch is located above the display.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to
operate even though the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 482.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and connected
to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED lights located within the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the overhead console
will turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data
Ú page 482 as authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspen-
sion system, there is a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire. This feature can be activated
through the Uconnect system Ú page 249.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Air Suspension,
you will need to enable Tire Jack Mode in the
Uconnect system Ú page 165 before changing
the tire.
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear wheel
diagonally opposite of each jacking
position. For example, if the driver’s front
wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove
the plastic access cover located on the side of
the front passenger’s seat. To remove the
cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to
the front of the seat) toward you to release a
locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose,
slide the cover toward the front of the seat until
it is free from the seat frame.
Pull Jack Access Cover From Front
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing
bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt
and then slide the assembly out from under the
seat.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter
extension 5 to jack extension 4 will enable
lowering the spare tire without having to raise
the tailgate.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
5 — Short Extension 5
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening
on extension 4 is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from
improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension 5
6 — Extension With Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the protective cover over the
access hole for the winch mechanism by
sliding the cover upward.
Access Hole Cover Location
3. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
(Continued)
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Tilting The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Connect the jack handle driver to the
extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See below images for
proper jacking locations.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
When changing a front wheel, place the
scissor jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown. Access the
front jacking location from behind the front
tire.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with
jack hook and the lug wrench. The exten-
sion tubes may be used but is not required.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
extension with jack hook to the jack and
connect the extension tubes. Access the
rear jacking location from behind the rear
tire. Place the jack under the Jack Lifting
Point located on the rear axle lower control
arm bracket. Then locate the slot in the jack
lift plate onto the rear axle Jack Lifting Point.
Attach the extension with jack hook extend-
ing to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the long extensions to the lug
wrench.
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
ground surface.
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the vehicle has been
completely lowered.
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each lug nut has been tightened twice
Ú page 467. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
center cap, install the cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Stow the replaced tire, and secure the jack
and tools in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle for convenience in checking the
spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
3. Remove the extension with the hook and
reattach the short extension 5. Attach the
lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle
Ú page 378. Insert the extension tubes
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise
until the wheel is drawn into place against
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
turning the jack turn-screw counter-
clockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into
the fastener on the floor.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
down location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Positive Battery Post
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnection procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the
fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure in case of an
emergency is described on Ú page 208.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
open the Manual Park Release cover, which
is located to the lower left of the steering
column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access
cover is the orange tether strap. Pull the
tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The tether and lever will remain
outside of the trim panel and the
transmission should now be in NEUTRAL,
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Manual Park Release Tether
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release
it.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
(Continued)
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever
back to its original position.
Manual Park Release Tether
4. Verify the transmission is in PARK.
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1
through 4.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Push the “ESC OFF” switch to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 312. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the “ESC OFF” switch again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as
described on Ú page 230.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four
Corner Air Suspension System must be placed
in Transport mode, before tying them down
(from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
Ú page 165. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles
(not to the body). Failure to follow these instruc-
tions may cause fault codes to be set and/or
cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Detailed instruction on Ú page 230
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
(Continued)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment FCA’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, find Instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK
Ú page 390.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 390.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) and farther than 30 miles (48 km),
tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
hold the front wheels in the straight position
with the rear wheels raised when and the
front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
7
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency
tow hooks.
Emergency Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 353.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 355.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
395
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe operating conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE:
Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or predominately at idle
or very low engine RPM are known as Severe
Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you
change the engine oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required
maintenance. More frequent maintenance may
be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving. In some
extreme conditions, additional maintenance
not specified in the maintenance schedule may
be required.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change the oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner, as necessary.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing,
change axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace
accessory drive belt with OEM grade
Mopar belt.
X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions will cause the
change oil message to illuminate more
frequently. Have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering,
and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules for required maintenance.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner, as necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change
the axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter
assembly.
1
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not
exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change transfer case fluid. X
1. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe operating conditions,
or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO
B20 B
IODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
six months, whichever comes first when
using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for
B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change
indicator system does not reflect the use of
biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
every second oil change. This is especially
important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 472.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
5.7L ENGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise
the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
NOTE:
It is possible for your oil level to be slightly
higher than a previous check. This would be due
to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in the
crankcase due to operation of the diesel partic-
ulate filter regeneration strategy (if equipped).
This fuel will evaporate out under normal oper-
ation.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood
and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container,
aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
paint or trim.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 386.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL — GAS ENGINE
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA
recommends engine oils that meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and
meet the requirements of FCA LLC.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six)
fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator filter housing is
located inside the frame rail, behind the left
front wheel. The best access to this water drain
valve is from under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running, or while the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN position, the “Water In
Fuel Indicator Light” will illuminate and an
audible chime will be heard. At this point, you
should stop the engine and drain the water from
the filter housing.
Fuel Filter Assembly
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on
and a single chime is heard while you are
driving, or with the ignition in the ON position,
there may be a problem with your water
separator wiring or sensor. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel
filter, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
remain illuminated for approximately 10
seconds. If the water was drained while the
engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on
recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your
area.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine
damage.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water,
then turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
and allow any accumulated water to drain.
Leave the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. When clean
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it
clockwise, and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel
have been drained Ú page 414.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet FCA’s filtra-
tion and water separating requirements can
severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter
should be replaced every 20,000 miles (every
other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
severe operating conditions, or In certain
geographical areas of the country (Pennsyl-
vania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia,
Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri
and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness’ issues,
it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every
10,000 miles.
Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Turn engine off.
2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter
assembly.
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any
accumulated water drain.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of it according to your
local regulations.
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing clean.
8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
2 — Fuel Filter Access
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot
on brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position.
This will activate the in tank fuel pump for
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this
process twice.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure Ú page 144.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in
high pressure fuel system corrosion or
damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your diesel engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recom-
mended to assist with cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
(D
IESEL ENGINE)
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
you to additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine Ú page 114.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for
approximately 30 seconds at a time. Allow
two minutes between cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and be hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or
gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause
damage to the fuel system.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items that come
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants
Ú page 475 for further information.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door. Push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Glove Compartment
4. Disengage the glove compartment door
from its hinges by opening the glove
compartment past the travel stop and
pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, press on each end
until you hear an audible click.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops
by pushing in on the glove compartment
sides.
Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This
is not a reason to replace the belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start,
belt must be replaced with an OEM grade
Mopar belt.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, press the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to assure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 369.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 475.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is
cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month. When additional engine coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines
With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be between the ADD and
SAFE range on the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
reservoir neck.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing engine coolant. Advise
your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
(D
IESEL ENGINE)
The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly
reaches high temperature. The air is then
directed through a hose to the charge air cooler
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
(Continued)
and through another hose to the intake
manifold of the engine. This cooling process
enables more efficient burning of fuel resulting
in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the
system, keep the surfaces of the charge air
cooler, condenser and radiator clean and free
of debris. Periodically check the hoses leading
to and from the charge air cooler for cracks or
loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and
reduced engine performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically Ú page 395.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder
should be checked whenever the vehicle is
serviced, or immediately if the brake system
warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the
side of the reservoir of the brake master
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master
cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake
fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks Ú page 478.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid Ú page 478. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
FCA strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
recommended transmission fluid Ú page 478.
It is important to maintain the transmission fluid
at the correct level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level
Ú page 478. This inspection should be made
with the vehicle in a level position.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of
hole) for the front axle and rear axle.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder
Ú page 478.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 478.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some
off-highway types of service, will require
draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar
Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear
lubricant Ú page 478. The Mopar Limited Slip
Additive should be added to the gear lubricant
whenever a fluid change is made to an axle
equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE:
When refilling a limited slip differential axle
which requires a friction modification additive,
the additive should be added before the gear
lubricant to ensure proper additive fill.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole (or within
1/8 inch of the bottom) with the vehicle in a
level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the recommended fluid Ú page 478.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
External Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors
with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
F06 – 10 Amp Red OUTPUT TO UPFITTER PDC — If Equipped
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ID/CLEARANCE LIGHTS — If Equipped
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F25 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
Wake Up / EPS / Active Tuned Mass Module (ATMM) / ESP
F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – 15 Amp Red MOD ATMM
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #5 — If Equipped
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump
F44 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera
F45 – 10 Amp Red ADCM — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl (Diesel Only)
F50 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #6 — If Equipped
F51 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #1 — If Equipped
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump – If Equipped
F54 – 15 Amp Blue PCM
F55 – 15 Amp Blue Right HID Headlamp
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #2 — If Equipped
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve
F61 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp / Spare
F62
60 Amp Blue
40 Amp Green
– Glow Plug (DSL) / LTR Coolant Pump (TRX)
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Internal Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located under
the drivers side instrument panel. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
to the following chart.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan
F06 – – Spare
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation / SW Inverter
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp — If Equipped
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)
F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp — If Equipped
F33 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist / Heads Up
Display (HUD)
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof / USB
Charge Only
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle — If Equipped
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue
Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Mod ICS Sw Bank / HVAC Ctrl / Sw
Bank Upper / Mod Ctrl Steering
F42 A&B – 10 Amp Red
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric Park
Brake SW / Overhead Console (OHC) SW / E-Call / Bank 3 SW / Seat
LT & RT Vent / Mod Trailer A&B Tire Pressure / Mod Gateway Trailer
F43 A&B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Mod CD / Front & Rear USB
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow
Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod / Fleet Telematics Module
(FTM)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 A&B – – Spare
F48A - 10 Amp Red
Rear View Mirror / SW Window Passenger / Rear USB / Wireless
Charging Pad Mod
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting
Sensor (AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod
F51 A&B – – Spare
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed — If Equipped
F53 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Reverse Steering Control / Trailer Steering Control Knob
F54B – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter — If Equipped
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface — If Equipped
F57 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed — If Equipped
F58 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed — If Equipped
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod HVAC
Snsr Incar Temp / Rear Coolant Temp / PTS / Mod IRCM / HRLS /
Mod Gateway Trailer TPM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run Accessory Feed — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped
Low Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the low beam access cover, which
can be found on the back side of the
headlamps.
Low Beam Headlight Cover
NOTE:
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating
counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
High Beam
High Beam Headlight Cover
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the high beam access cover, which
can be found on the back side of the
headlamps.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counter-
clockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and cover.
Front Park And Turn
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the park and turn socket, which can
be found on the back side of the
headlamps.
Park And Turn Socket
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the
park and turn socket from the lamp by
rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
Side Marker Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the side marker lamp, which can be
found on the back side of the headlamps.
Side Marker Lamp
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
4. Disengage the side marker socket by
rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from
the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Please see an authorized dealer for service on
LED and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
See below steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and cover.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws and push pins
retainers that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Fasteners
3 — Push - Pin Retainers
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward
far enough to unsnap the two receptacles
on the outboard side of the lamp housing
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
Tail Lamp Removal
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
Wiring Harness Connector
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and housing.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the four screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Bulb Location
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove the socket
and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the
socket.
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of
bulbs and housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contract other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in Vehicle Loading
Ú page 213.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 213.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm)
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 327.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 391.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information Ú page 453.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed Ú page 452.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 444.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in sud-
den tire failure. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 222.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
HFE
Tradesman
Bighorn Lonestar
Laramie
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Longhorn
Sport
Limited
Rear 275/55R20 S Class
REBEL Not Chainable
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
(Continued)
(Continued)
4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn Lonestar
Laramie
Rear
275/65R18
275/55/R20
S Class
Longhorn
Sport
Limited
Rear 275/55R20 S Class
REBEL Not Chainable
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl
Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
(Continued)
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and
maintain the chrome components of the
vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt
using an automotive soap. Fascia/bumpers
should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and
to prevent corrosion.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals
or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading.
To help maintain the appearance of your
Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer
recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt
from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner available at a local
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes, or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom-
mended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions, strong alkaline
additives, or harsh brushes. Many after-
market cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to
remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water.
Then apply solution with a soft cloth or
brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist
towel or sponge and wipe over the entire
surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods
of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On
Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage
a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is
when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that
pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or
sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not
covered by your new vehicle warranty, a
cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the
scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge,
follow the directions provided in the Mopar
Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products
to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products
can become slippery and may result in
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present,
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is
removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
467
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining
system will still function with some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and the “Brake Warning Light” and the
“ABS Warning Light” will activate during brake
use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130
Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 469
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. FCA
recommends that gasoline without MMT be
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 471
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to
the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
(formerly known as the American Society for
Testing and Materials) specification D-975
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F
or -7°C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use Climatized Number 2 diesel fuel or
dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with 50%
Number 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of
the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water
separator filter using the fuel/water separator
drain provided on the fuel filter housing. If you
buy good quality fuel and follow the cold
weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
not be required in your vehicle. If available in
your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel
may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take
advantage of the high energy content and
generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
Climatized diesel fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso-
line on your diesel vehicle, do not start the
engine. Damage to the engine and fuel
system could occur. Please call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your diesel engine without any adjustments
to regular service schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not
necessary for the proper operation of your
diesel engine.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic condi-
tions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
engine damage Ú page 412.
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D975 is recommended for
use with your diesel engine. If frequent
operation with Biodiesel blends that are
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter
intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
replacement is subject to shorter intervals
when operating your engine on biodiesel
greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater
than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
understand and comply with these
requirements. For further direction
Ú page 403.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME)
base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or
SOME) base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20).
There are no unique restrictions for the use of
B5.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for
both storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such
as storing the fuel in a heated building or a
heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
additives.
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) will result in premature engine
wear. Such wear is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not
approved. Use of blends greater than 20%
can result in engine damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with
biodiesel and not used for more than a
month, the fuel should either be used up by
driving (up to quarter tank) and filled with
standard diesel blends with less than 5% that
is normally available. This will help prevent
the fuel filter clogging and potential damage
to the fuel injection system due to degraded
biodiesel, which is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 473
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to
meet Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
specification D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if
stored properly, provides for protection against
fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar
Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar
filtration system is designed to provide
adequate fuel water separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been
observed with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in
oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is
met your oil change interval must be
maintained with in the suggested schedule. The
regular use of biodiesel between 6% and 20%
requires intervals shorter than the outlined
10,000 miles (16,100 km) and must not
exceed the suggested schedule. When routinely
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil
and filter replacement intervals must not
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,900 km) or six months,
which ever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
filter change intervals. When operating on
biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
replacement intervals should be every second
oil change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
(25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
six months, if regular operation occurs with 6%
- 20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
every second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure
to comply with these oil change and fuel filter
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in prema-
ture engine wear. Such wear is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine
may suffer severe damage if operated with
concentrations of biodiesel higher than 20%.
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 475
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Gas Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Motor Generator Unit – 3.6L Engine (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Gas Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand engine oil filters.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engines
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not
use E-85).
Diesel Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar that meets FCA Material
Standard MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil category is required.
Diesel Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar engine oil filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet FCA’s
filtration requirements can severely impact engine life and reliability.
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
We recommend you use Mopar fuel filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that
does not meet FCA’s filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced
every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe
operating conditions, or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York,
Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska)
due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles
(16,000 km).
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum)
and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade
S15 will provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel,
meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20%
biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals
are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to
the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system
damage.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 477
(Continued)
NOTE:
If Climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not avail-
able, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C),
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium
Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recom-
mended to avoid gelling.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand 2–speed
Transfer Case (With 4WD AUTO)
We recommend you use Mobil Fluid LT.
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed Transfer
Case (Without 4WD AUTO)
We recommend you use Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389.
Front Axle We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55)
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160).
Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
Rear Axle (3.92)
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985).
Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend You Use Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
479
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
10
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
480 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/
TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the FCA US LLC's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 481
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov .
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP .
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481
482 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482
483
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)
................................................ 177 , 179
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............422
Adding Fuel .......................................... 208 , 210
Additives, Fuel ...............................................469
Adjust
Down
...........................................................36
Forward ....................................................... 36
Rearward..................................................... 36
Up................................................................ 36
Adjustable Pedals ............................................43
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................279
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................344
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 342 , 345
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 353 , 394
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................394
Front Air Bag .............................................345
If Deployment Occurs ................................352
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................349
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............354
Maintenance .............................................354
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............343
Transporting Pets ......................................369
Air Bag Light ............................... 126 , 342, 369
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ............................................................ 411
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 415
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 415
Air Conditioner System ................................. 415
Air Conditioning ................................................63
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................67 , 415
Air Conditioning System ...................................65
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................66
Air Filter ........................................................ 411
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 450
Air Suspension ..................................... 165 , 169
Alarm
Security Alarm
....................................26 , 127
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
.........................................................11
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 422 , 474
Disposal ................................................... 423
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 310
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 132
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 317
Audio Settings ............................................... 266
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 236
Auto Down Power Windows .............................78
Automatic Door Locks ......................................30
Automatic Headlights .......................................54
Automatic High Beams .....................................53
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................85
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............65
Automatic Transmission .......................156 , 426
Adding Fluid .............................................. 426
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 426
Fluid Change ............................................. 426
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 426
Fluid Type ........................................426 , 478
Special Additives ...................................... 426
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 159
AutoPark ....................................................... 141
AUX Camera .........................................204 , 208
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 318
Axle Fluid..............................................426 , 478
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 426
B
Back-Up
......................................................... 202
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 202
Battery ................................................. 128 , 409
Charging System Light .............................. 128
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................18
Battery Saver Feature ......................................57
Belts, Seat .................................................... 369
11
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483
484
Blind Spot Monitoring
....................................318
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................275
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................418
B-Pillar Location .............................................447
Brake Assist System ......................................311
Brake Control System ....................................311
Brake Fluid .......................................... 425 , 478
Brake System ...................................... 425 , 467
Fluid Check ...............................................425
Master Cylinder .........................................425
Parking ......................................................151
Warning Light ............................................126
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................155
Bulb Replacement .........................................437
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 371 , 437
C
Camera ..........................................................202
Camera, AUX ........................................ 204 , 208
Camera, Rear ...................................... 202 , 204
Camper ............................................................ 97
Capacities, Fuel .............................................474
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
................................................404
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................423
Car Washes ...................................................462
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................... 371 , 372
Cargo Light.......................................................56
CD................................................................. 268
Cellular Phone .............................................. 309
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 442
Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................68
Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 424
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 444
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
............................................................. 138
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 369
Checks, Safety .............................................. 369
Child Restraint .............................................. 355
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 358
Child Seat Installation ..................... 364 , 365
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 363
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 357
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 362
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 360
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 357
Seating Positions ...................................... 359
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 469
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 456
Climate Control ................................................60
Automatic ....................................................60
Manual ........................................................63
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 146
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 455
Connected Services ...................................... 282
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 301
Connected Services Features ....................... 286
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 284
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 282
Contract, Service ........................................... 480
Controls ........................................................ 259
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 423
Cooling System ............................................. 421
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 422
Coolant Level ...................................421 , 423
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 474
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 423
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 422
Inspection ................................................. 423
Points To Remember ................................ 424
Pressure Cap ............................................ 423
Radiator Cap ............................................. 423
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.........................422 , 474, 475
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 461
Cruise Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 178
Cancel....................................................... 179
Resume .................................................... 179
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............177, 179
Cruise Light ................................................... 136
Customer Assistance .................................... 479
Cybersecurity ................................................ 236
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484
485
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 53
Dealer Service ...............................................409
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................63
Defroster, Windshield .............................63 , 369
Deleting A Phone ...........................................275
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................137
Diesel Fuel .....................................................471
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................471
Bulk Storage Of .........................................210
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................414
Differential, Limited Slip ................................174
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................392
Disc Drive ......................................................268
Disconnecting ................................................275
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................423
Disturb...........................................................278
Door Ajar........................................................129
Door Ajar Light ...............................................129
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................... 30
Doors ............................................................... 27
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............412
Driver Memory Presets ..................................265
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 34
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.....................................234
Dual Rear Wheels ..........................................467
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 311
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 310
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 312 , 318
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 151
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................74
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...................... 159
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 312
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 128
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 161, 163
Emergency Braking ....................................... 327
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 389
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 391
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 373
Jump Starting ........................................... 386
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 138
Engine........................................................... 404
Air Cleaner ................................................ 411
Block Heater ............................................. 150
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 150
Compartment ................404 , 405, 406, 407
Compartment
Identification .............404, 405, 406, 407
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 475
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 371 , 372
Fails To Start ............................................ 144
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 144
Fuel Requirements .......................... 468 , 474
Idling ........................................................ 148
Jump Starting ........................................... 386
Oil ...........................................410 , 474, 475
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 404
Oil Filter .................................................... 410
Oil Selection..................................... 410 , 474
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 410
Overheating .............................................. 389
Starting ............................................143 , 144
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 353 , 394
Entry System, Illuminated ................................58
Ethanol.......................................................... 469
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........................371 , 372
Exhaust System ...................................371 , 420
Exterior Lighting ...............................................52
Exterior Lights ........................................ 52 , 371
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 300
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 411
Air Conditioning ................................. 67 , 415
Engine Fuel ............................................... 412
Engine Oil ........................................ 410 , 475
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 410
Flashers
Turn Signals
.............................. 55 , 136, 371
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................54
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 384
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 474
11
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485
486
Fluid Leaks
....................................................371
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................425
Fluid, Brake ...................................................478
Fog Lights ...............................................55 , 441
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 34
Forward Collision Warning .............................324
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................161
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................373
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................391
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................426
Fuel ............................................ 210 , 468, 471
Adding ............................................. 208 , 210
Additives ...................................................469
Clean Air ....................................................469
Ethanol ......................................................469
Filter ..........................................................412
Gasoline ....................................................468
Light ..........................................................131
Materials Added ........................................469
Methanol ...................................................469
Octane Rating ........................ 468 , 469, 475
Requirements ........................ 468 , 471, 474
Specifications ............................................471
Tank Capacity ............................................474
Fuses .............................................................427
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................49
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 469
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 469
Gauges
Voltage
..................................................... 146
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 466
Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................39
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 215
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 214
Guide
Body Builders ..............................................11
GVWR............................................................ 213
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 234
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 373
Head Restraints ...............................................40
Head Rests ......................................................40
Headlights .................................................... 439
Cleaning ................................................... 462
High Beam ...................................................53
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........53
Lights On Reminder .....................................55
Passing ........................................................54
Switch..........................................................52
Heated Mirrors .................................................48
Heated Seats ...................................................38
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 150
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
..............................................................53
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 315
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 315
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 317
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 218
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................49
Hood Prop ........................................................84
Hood Release ...................................................84
I
Ignition .............................................................21
Switch ..........................................................21
Illuminated Entry ..............................................58
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 44 , 45, 373
Instrument Cluster ............................... 110 , 113
Descriptions............................110 , 113, 136
Display ...................................................... 114
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 465
Integrated Trailer Brake Control .................... 223
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 464
Interior Lights ...................................................57
Intervention Regeneration Strategy .....121, 414
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................75
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486
487
J
Jack Location
.................................................377
Jump Starting ................................................386
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 20
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ............................................................... 18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
............................................................... 20
Keyless Enter-N-Go .................................28 , 143
Passive Entry ............................................... 28
Keys.................................................................17
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................ 55
Lane Change Assist .........................................55
LaneSense ....................................................199
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................336
Latches..........................................................371
Hood ........................................................... 84
Lead Free Gasoline ........................................468
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................371
Life Of Tires ...................................................452
Light Bulbs........................................... 371 , 437
Lights ............................................................ 371
Air Bag .................................... 126 , 342, 369
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 314
Brake Warning .......................................... 126
Bulb Replacement .................................... 437
Cargo ...........................................................56
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 442
Courtesy/Reading .......................................57
Cruise ....................................................... 136
Daytime Running .........................................53
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ............................................... 128
Exterior ...............................................52 , 371
Fog ........................................................... 441
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 373
Headlights ............................................52 , 54
High Beam ...................................................53
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................53
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 315
Illuminated Entry .........................................58
Interior.........................................................57
Lights On Reminder .....................................55
Low Fuel ................................................... 131
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 130
Park .......................................................... 135
Passing ........................................................54
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 126
Security Alarm .......................................... 127
Service...................................................... 437
Traction Control ........................................ 314
Turn Signals ............55, 136, 371, 439, 441
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................ 128 , 136
Limited-Slip Differential .......................174 , 427
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 125
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 125
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 125
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 125
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 213
Tires.......................................................... 447
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................30
Child Protection ...........................................31
Power Door ..................................................28
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 327
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 418
Lug Nuts........................................................ 467
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 467
M
Maintenance
.............................................81 , 84
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 409
Maintenance Schedule ...............395, 399, 400
11
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 487
488
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
..........................................................130
Manual
Service ......................................................482
Media Hub ....................................................... 72
Media Mode ..................................................268
Memory Seat ................................................... 32
Memory Settings ............................................. 32
Methanol .......................................................469
Mirrors ............................................................. 44
Electric Powered ......................................... 47
Heated ........................................................48
Memory ....................................................... 32
Outside........................................................ 46
Rearview .....................................44 , 45, 373
Trailer Towing .............................................. 48
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................327
Mopar Parts ...................................................481
MP3 Control .................................................... 72
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 53
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
................ 150 , 151
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................334
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 468, 469
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ....................235
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 235
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 410
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 410
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 128
Oil, Engine............................................ 410 , 475
Capacity.................................................... 474
Dipstick .................................................... 408
Disposal ................................................... 410
Filter ................................................ 410 , 475
Filter Disposal ........................................... 410
Identification Logo .................................... 410
Materials Added To .................................. 410
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 128
Recommendation ............................ 410 , 474
Synthetic .................................................. 410
Viscosity ................................................... 474
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 137
Operating Precautions .................................. 137
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 482
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................46
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 389
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 461
Parking Brake ............................................... 151
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 195
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 189
Passive Entry ...................................................28
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................43
Pets............................................................... 369
Phone Mode .................................................. 271
Pickup Box ................................................90 , 92
Pinch Protection ........................................81 , 83
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 447
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..............428 , 432
Door Locks...................................................28
Mirrors .........................................................47
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........74, 75
Seats ...........................................................36
Side Steps ...................................................28
Sliding Rear Window ....................................79
Steering ............................................. 47 , 174
Sunroof .................................................80 , 82
Windows ......................................................77
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................36
Forward .......................................................36
Rearward .....................................................36
Recline.........................................................37
Tilt................................................................37
Up ................................................................36
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 340
Presets .......................................................... 265
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 340
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 488
489
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................451
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 421, 423
Radio
Presets
......................................................265
Radio Controls ...............................................259
Radio Mode ...................................................259
Radio Operation .................................. 259 , 309
Radio Remote Controls ..................................259
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 59
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................426
Rear Camera .................................................204
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 91
Rear Cross Path .............................................321
Rear ParkSense System ................................189
Rear Window, Sliding ....................................... 79
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 36
Recreational Towing ......................................230
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....232
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..233
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................469
Refrigerant ....................................................415
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................283
Release, Hood ................................................. 84
Release, Tailgate ............................................. 85
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................335
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .. 290, 302
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ................291
Remote Features, Starting .................. 291 , 303
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 259
Remote Start (Diesel) ......................................25
Remote Start (Gasoline) ..................................22
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................23
Remote Starting System ...........................22 , 25
Remove, Tailgate .............................................86
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 437
Replacement Tires ........................................ 453
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 481
Restraints, Child ........................................... 355
Restraints, Head ..............................................40
Roadside Assistance ............................ 292 , 302
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 460
S
Safety ........................................................... 258
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 369
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 371
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 481
Safety Features ............................................. 258
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 443
Safety Tips .................................................... 369
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 371
Satellite Radio .............................................. 261
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 265
Schedule, Maintenance ..............395, 399, 400
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 126
Seat Belts ............................................335 , 369
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 339
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 339
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 339
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 341
Child Restraints ........................................ 355
Energy Management Feature ................... 340
Extender ................................................... 340
Front Seat ...............................335 , 336, 338
Inspection ................................................. 369
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 338
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 339
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 336
Operating Instructions .............................. 338
Pregnant Women ...................................... 340
Pretensioners ........................................... 340
Rear Seat.................................................. 336
Reminder .................................................. 335
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 340
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 340
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 335
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 339
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 465
11
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 489
490
Seats
................................................. 34 , 35, 36
Adjustment ........................................... 34 , 36
Easy Entry ................................................... 37
Head Restraints .......................................... 40
Memory ....................................................... 32
Power .......................................................... 36
Rear Folding ................................................ 34
Reclining Rear ............................................. 36
Tilting .......................................................... 34
Security System ......................................26 , 127
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................475
Send & Go ........................................... 293 , 302
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 20
Service Assistance .........................................479
Service Contract ............................................480
Service Manuals ............................................482
Settings, Audio ..............................................266
Shifting ..........................................................154
Automatic Transmission ............................156
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................232
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................233
Shoulder Belts ...............................................336
Side Steps, Power ............................................28
Signals, Turn ..................................55 , 136, 371
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................261
Favorites ...................................................264
Replay .......................................................262
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 264
Favorites................................................... 264
Replay ...................................................... 262
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................79
Smart Watch ................................................. 300
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 458
Snow Plow .................................................... 227
Snow Tires .................................................... 454
SOS Call ............................................... 286 , 301
Spare Tires .......................................... 455 , 456
Spark Plugs ................................................... 475
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 179
Starting .......................................140 , 143, 144
Automatic Transmission ........................... 141
Button .........................................................21
Cold Weather ............................................ 146
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 144
Starting And Operating ......................... 143 , 144
Starting Procedures ............................. 143 , 144
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 140
Steering
Power
....................................................... 174
Tilt Column ..................................................31
Wheel, Heated ......................................31 , 32
Wheel, Tilt....................................................31
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 259
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 259
Steps, Power Side ............................................28
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ....................297 , 303
Storage ............................................................68
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................68
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 66 , 461
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 265
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 461
Sun Roof .....................................80 , 81, 82, 84
Sunglasses Storage .........................................70
Sunshade Operation ........................................81
Suspension
Air .................................................... 165 , 169
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 318
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 410
T
Tailgate Removal
.............................................86
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................85
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................31
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............65
Tilt
Down
...........................................................37
Up ................................................................37
Tilt Steering Column .........................................31
Tip Start ........................................................ 143
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 447
Tire Markings ................................................ 443
Tire Safety Information .................................. 443
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 490
491
Tires
...................................371 , 449, 455, 460
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................452
Air Pressure ...............................................449
Chains .......................................................458
Compact Spare .........................................455
Dual...........................................................467
General Information ........................ 449 , 455
High Speed ................................................451
Inflation Pressure ......................................450
Life Of Tires ...............................................452
Load Capacity ............................................447
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
........................................ 131 , 327
Quality Grading ..........................................460
Radial ........................................................451
Replacement .............................................453
Rotation ....................................................460
Safety .............................................. 443 , 449
Sizes..........................................................444
Snow Tires .................................................454
Spare Tires ...................................... 455 , 456
Spinning ....................................................452
Trailer Towing ............................................222
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................452
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................467
To Open Hood .................................................. 84
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................219
Tonneau Cover .......................................97 , 462
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................462
Towing ................................................. 214 , 392
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 392
Guide........................................................ 218
Recreational ............................................. 230
Weight ...................................................... 218
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 230
Traction......................................................... 234
Traction Control ............................................ 318
Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................... 219
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 318
Trailer Towing ............................................... 214
Hitches ..................................................... 218
Minimum Requirements ........................... 221
Mirrors .........................................................48
Tips........................................................... 227
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 219
Wiring ....................................................... 225
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 218
Trailer Weight ................................................ 218
Transfer Case ............................................... 427
Electronically Shifted ....................... 161 , 163
Fluid ......................................................... 478
Transmission ................................................ 156
Automatic ........................................ 156 , 426
Fluid ......................................................... 478
Maintenance ............................................ 426
Shifting ..................................................... 154
Transporting Pets .......................................... 369
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 452
Turn Signals .........................55 , 136, 439, 441
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 276
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 279
Uconnect App ................................................ 284
Uconnect Phone ...................................272 , 273
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 278
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 277
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 281
Call Continuation ...................................... 279
Call Controls ............................................. 277
Call Termination ....................................... 279
Cancel Command ..................................... 273
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................ 275
Help Command ......................................... 273
Join Calls .................................................. 279
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 275
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ........................................ 278
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 276
Natural Speech ......................................... 272
Operation .................................................. 272
Overview ................................................... 271
11
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 491
492
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
...................................................273
Phonebook Download ...............................275
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............278
Power-Up ...................................................281
Recent Calls ..............................................277
Redial ........................................................279
To Remove A Favorite ...............................276
Toggling Between Calls .............................278
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................277
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..279
Voice Command ........................................279
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 28
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 28
Uconnect System ...........................................256
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................460
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................468
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................339
USB .................................................................72
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ........................... 91
V
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 295 , 303
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 298
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 297
Vehicle Loading ................................... 213 , 447
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 409
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 298
Vehicle Storage .......................................66 , 461
Voice Command ...............................................41
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................41
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 131
Warnings And Cautions ....................................11
Warranty Information .................................... 481
Washers, Windshield .................................... 408
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 462
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 234
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ................................................ 412
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 456
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 456
Wi-fi............................................................... 296
Wind Buffeting .................................................80
Window Fogging ...............................................66
Windows ..........................................................77
Power...........................................................77
Rear Sliding .................................................79
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................78
Windshield Defroster .................................... 369
Windshield Washers .............................. 58 , 408
Fluid................................................... 58 , 408
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 418
Windshield Wipers ...........................................58
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 418
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................59
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................77
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 492
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
RAM 1500
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
21_DT_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 RAM 1500
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
